JP2020130350A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve amusement of games in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided with a plurality of settings of game performances and the game performances are set by setting values used for setting the game performances. The game machine executes a variable display game. When a predetermined condition is established (for example, a formation of a ready-to-win) while the variable display game is being executed, an execution of a suggestion of a setting value used for setting the game performance is notified (a suggestion execution prediction). After that, the game machine, while continuing the execution of the variable display game, newly displays a suggestion presentation display 515 for displaying a suggestion presentation suggesting the setting value and executes the suggestion presentation in the suggestion presentation display 515 to suggest the setting value set in the game machine to the player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

There are gaming machines that have multiple gaming performances and whose gaming performance can be changed by changing the settings.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-08933

In such a game machine, since the player does not give a clue to guess the setting, the player loses the opportunity to gain interest by guessing the setting of the game machine, and the interest of the game is improved. It wasn't enough.

In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a game machine as shown below is provided. The game machine includes a display means, a setting means, and a control means. The display means can display the game. The setting means can set one of two or more different game performances. The control means is
A suggestion effect suggesting the game performance set in parallel with the game effect in the second period after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the predetermined game effect is executed in the game in the first period until the predetermined condition is satisfied. To execute.

According to one aspect, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 5) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the game control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the performance display device which is the display means of the base of 1st Embodiment, and the storage area for a base. It is a figure which shows the display example by the performance display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display screen of the display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation between the setting value of a game machine and suggestion content in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the suggestion content in the suggestion effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of suggestion of the set value in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation between the character and the suggestion content in the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 4 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the push button in the modification 5 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 7 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effective line in the modification 8 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of suggestion of the set value in the modification 8 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 8 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the structural example of the display screen of the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the structural example of the display screen of the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the structural example of the display screen of the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart (No. 1) which shows the flow of suggestion of the set value in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart (No. 2) which shows the flow of suggestion of the set value in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of suggestion of the setting value in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect group lottery table of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion intensity of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the command at the time of RAM initialization of 4th Embodiment, and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable system command of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead variation system command of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting suggestion effect group determination process of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of suggestion production opportunity standard 1 and suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion mode and setting suggestion mode history notification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the accessory of 4th Embodiment, and an example of a suggestion embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the gaming performance of the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pending digestion example 1 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pending digestion example 2 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pending digestion example 3 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pending digestion example 4 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of whether or not the hold look-ahead notice of a fifth embodiment can be executed. It is a figure which shows the pending digestion example of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the modification of the 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the advance notice notification target limited processing of the modification of the 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is assembled to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example,). Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and sound (blinking)
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound effect) is provided. further,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, it should be noted
A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hit ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit (push button) 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of 1. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, the front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the 2 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the game machine 1
0 can produce an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. For example
The effect of intervening the operation of the player includes an effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the game machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to operate the character to be displayed and to stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is configured to be surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters that produce the special figure variation display game, and background images that enhance the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 has a display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal figure start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal figure start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
In addition, it is located below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing, and on the right side of the center case 40,
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right to facilitate the inflow of game balls. The 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (general electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow down path 91. A guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91. The guiding portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches the game ball flowing downward and guides the game ball to the left where the special variable winning device 38 described later exists. ..

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is installed. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 3
It has 8c, and the opening / closing member 3 depends on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game.
From the closed state where 8c closed the big winning opening (closed state which is disadvantageous to the player), the opening / closing member 38c is evacuated to the open state where the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be accepted (favorable state for the player). Convert. That is, the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device.
A large prize opening) is provided, and during the big hit game state (first special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the small hit game state (small hit game state) based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. During the second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). Is to be given. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, the special variable winning device 38 includes a guiding flow path for guiding the winning game ball in the winning opening, and a V flow path formed by branching from the guiding flow path. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position serving as an inflow portion of the V flow path. The V-door slides in the front-rear direction by the specific region solenoid 38d (see FIG. 3) to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path, and the V door retracts backward to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path. It can be changed to a permissible state that allows inflow. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball flowing into the V flow path.

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path in the special game state and the specific area switch. It is set to a high probability state based on the detection at 38e.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and two may be provided, and when there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switch 38a is about one or two, respectively. , X pieces (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

A warp port (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is the starting winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win a prize.

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to start the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in a special variable winning device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 that displays various information and displays a game that changes the normal map triggered by a prize
Is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU.
It is composed of a data bus 140 or the like that connects the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
It has a crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DCs (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
rect Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V and other DC voltages of a predetermined level are supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC (DC32V) DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply.
Alternating Current) -DC 12V, DC 5V from DC converter or DC 32V voltage
Normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10. It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM (Random Access Memory) of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and causes and recovers the power failure in the game control device 100. It includes a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to inform.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , It may be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
Since the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or power failure. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 steps.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change the settings 1 to 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LE.
It is D and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 shifts the control state to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the game machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or R
As the AM111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a variation pattern random number 1, a variation pattern random number 2, and a variation pattern random number 3 stored as a start memory in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generates and outputs a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, etc. And the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (original clock signal)
Based on this, it is provided with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving operating state), the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, CP
The U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the game machine 10.
Control to pay out the loan.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38 in the special variable winning device 38
a, Connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable winning device 38, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and 0
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts a V-5V positive logic signal is provided. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11.
By setting it to V, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch being improperly shorted, the sensor or switch being disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire being cut and floating. It is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, in FIG. 3, the winning opening switch 35a is 1.
Although shown by the blocks, in reality, a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are close to each other by different signal lines. I
It is input to / F121. Further, although the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (3 in the present embodiment) are actually used.
(Pieces) are provided on the game board 30. And these multiple big prize opening switches 38a,
They are connected by different signal lines, or, for example, a switch and a game control device 10.
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Of the outputs of 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 3
The detection signal of 8e is input to the second input port 123. The signal outputs (outputs from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, are shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but are actually shown. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) from the device 200 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (effective level), which is not shown, by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. It can be read by changing to). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and a payout control device 20.
Frame radio wave invalid signal from 0 (signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting radio waves), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands) (Signal indicating abnormal payout), status signal indicating abnormal payout (status signal indicating abnormal payout)
, Shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (they are full)
1st input port 122 that takes in the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal that is output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided.

The out-ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out-sensor every time the out-sensor (not shown) detects one out-ball of the game machine 10. For example, the out-ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out-ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a gaming performance (eg, 60,000 out-balls) per given operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls).
It is used for the calculation of the base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance in a decimal number or a hexadecimal number.

Further, the game machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the V door of the special variable winning device 38. A first output port 134a for outputting open / close data of the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened / closed, open / close data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135 is provided. Has been done.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability set value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. 4th output port 1 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information on the external information terminal plate 71.
A fifth output port 134e for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal board 71
It is equipped with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be transmitted to the external device via the photo relay. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the peripheral solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. (Drive circuit) 138a, batch output from the second driver 138b, fourth output port 134d that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d, which output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw-in side of the display device 50, to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to the information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e that generates and outputs a drive signal of the performance display device 135 by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a are provided. Has been done.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
The output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, the relay board 70 may be provided instead of the main board. Further, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. The transmission and reception of such data is
Since it is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI31 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melody, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has 4.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A PROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a FeRAM that can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (FeRAM).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, and decorates the lamp. Lighting, drive control of motors and solenoids,
Performs processing such as managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSY from VDP 312 to signal conversion circuit 313
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 is a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) or the like provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 and the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) provided in the board effect device 44 (including). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the effect control device 300.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the above and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to or an electronic component controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC3.3V is based on DC5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPRESET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
It is also supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., and resets them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal drawing start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random value for hit judgment of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal figure variation display game Performs the process of determining the hit / miss. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, a process of displaying a normal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game A random value for jackpot determination is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or miss in the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, for the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. To do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 is a start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of a game ball flowing down the game area 32.
It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of a variable display game based on a prize.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the game is opened, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either, for example, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls being awarded to the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small hit game state is generated due to the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) being a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game ball to flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state.
Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a higher probability (normal figure high probability state) than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example) of the first hit stop symbol
500ms x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times (for example, 1700ms x 2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it can be set to 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 70
4 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is the normal probability when the normal operation state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1 /).
It is possible to have a higher probability than 251) (general figure high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal power support state (during normal power support or electric support).
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
Equipped with D. The batch display device 50 has a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d.
2 and various status displays are performed according to the lighting mode of LEDs_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the normal symbol symbol display unit 55, the normal figure hold display unit 56, the state display unit 57, and the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 has four LEDs, LEDs_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight Ls of the 7-segment LED_d1.
The symbol in the special figure 1 game is displayed according to the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7 and LE.
The game state in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting modes of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process and a timer interrupt process performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 10. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. Figure 9
Is a diagram (No. 4) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (No. 5) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment.

The main process is started by the control unit (gaming microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). RAM 11
The range of the address of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h at the beginning of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5).
.. The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (for example, the B register) (step S6), and then the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (for example, the B register). Read into the C register) (step S7).

Here, the predetermined bit of the first register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the second bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th bit, the 1st bit, and the 3rd bit to the 7th bit are cleared. Then, the predetermined bit of the second register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information of the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held by the second register is stored in RAM1.
It is retained as reference information that does not rely on 11C (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a state reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register (C register) is "0" after the 0th bit and the 1st bit, the 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared, and the 2nd bit is. It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the RAM initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is, the value “0000000000B” of the status reference register indicates a setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "00010000B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value “00010000B” of the status reference register indicates a RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

Further, the value "00000100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value “00000100B” of the status reference register indicates a setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

The value of the status reference register "00010100B" is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value “000010100B” of the status reference register indicates a power recovery (power failure recovery) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Since the storage position (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage position (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different, the B register and C Even with the logical sum of the registers, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are stored without being lost.

After that, a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that serves as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control device to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 10 is temporarily used.
It is possible to prevent the subordinate control means from missing the command by sending the command to the subordinate control means before 0 rises first and the subordinate control means rises. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 serves as a standby means for delaying the activation of the main control means and setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control means.

Also, when timing the power-on delay timer, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is judged (
It is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register that is not subject to validity judgment) that is not subject to checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register), but the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored before the start of the standby time. You can reliably save your operations. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is stored in the second register (C register), but the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be performed by storing the detection signal before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 12
If the state of 7 is read, the setting key switch 127 waits for the elapse of the waiting time.
It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 127 from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, a process for setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11).
), And then the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time ()
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S12), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S13).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1).
4). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the game machine 10 is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained.
When a power failure occurs here, it is not necessary to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S15), and the timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (step S16). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the check count of the power failure monitoring signal (step S12). Also, the timer value is "0".
(Step S16; Y), that is, when the waiting time has expired, the RAM 11
Allow read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) access to 1C, EEPROM, etc. (step S17), and output off-data to all output ports (set to no output).
(Step S18).

Next, the serial port (the port that is pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
Set (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step S19).
).

In step S20, a process of activating the CTC circuit that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

In step S21, a process of setting the RAM abnormality flag is performed. It should be noted that the set of the RAM abnormality flags is provisional and may be updated in the process of inspecting the RAM abnormality that is executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step). S23), power failure inspection area 2
If the value of is normal (step S23; Y), the checksum calculation process (step S24) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data of the game control work area and the data of the state display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data of the game control work area and the state display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S25), and when it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 (step S26).

When it is determined that the checksums do not match (is not normal) (step S25;
In N), by passing step S26 and shifting to step S27, the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 becomes deterministic. Even if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), it is tentatively set in step S21 by passing step S26 and moving to step S27. The RAM error flag is deterministic.

In step S27, the setting key switch 12 refers to the second register (C register).
It is determined whether or not the detection signal of 7 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the process proceeds to step S33, and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is If not on, step S
Proceed to 28.

Since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM initialization The detection signal of the conversion switch 112 can be determined at the same time. Further, the game control device 100 has a detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and a RAM.
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity determination of the RAM can be determined.

In step S28, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM error flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S30 when the RAM error flag is on (that is, when the RAM error flag is set), and when the RAM error flag is not on (that is, RAM).
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are processes executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is shut off during the setting and the RAM is restarted without being cleared. Step S3
At 0, the control unit transmits a command for notifying the main abnormality error to the effect control device 300.
As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command of the main abnormality error notification. For example, the effect control device 300 receives the command of the main abnormality error notification, displays a message instructing the restart accompanied by clearing the RAM on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command for notifying the main abnormality error, and notifies the main abnormality error by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44.

In step S31, the control unit displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped by the performance display device 135.
Output to. At this time, the control unit can display the status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135. Further, the control unit outputs the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability setting value display device 136. At this time, the control unit can display a numerical value or a character that is not in the probability set value on the probability set value display device 136. The control unit is L when the game is stopped.
The 7-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the batch display device 50. At this time, the control unit may turn off the batch display device 50 or turn it on all.

In step S32, the control unit outputs the on-data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from. At this time, the control unit turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71. The control unit repeatedly executes steps S31 and S32 and waits for the power to be cut off. That is, the game machine 10 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal plate 71 until the power is cut off. Further, the game machine 10 waits until the power is cut off.
No signal other than the security signal is output from the external information terminal board 71.

Note that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is cut off. As a result, the game machine 10 has NMI (No.
n-Maskable Interrupt) The return address can be stored in RAM when it occurs, reducing the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit waits for the power to be cut off in step S31.
And the stored contents of the RAM during repeated execution of step S32 are not protected by prohibiting RAM access, but since clearing the RAM at the time of restart is a condition for starting the game control, the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected is limited. There is. That is, the game machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected. Further, the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is cut off, so that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access, so that steps S31 and S32
It is possible to improve the program efficiency by making the subroutine callable in.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to setting change preparation, and step S
At 27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the RAM initialization switch 11
This is a process executed when the detection signal of 2 is on.

In step S33, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM error flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM error flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM error flag is not on.

In step S34, the control unit clears the set value because the RAM error flag is on. The set value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the set value, or by setting the most disadvantageous value for the player from the viewpoint of fraud countermeasures.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting the setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine 10 is changing the setting. The setting change mode flag is set when the setting is being changed, and the setting change mode is in progress when the setting is not being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S36, the control unit transmits a command whose setting is being changed to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command whose setting is being changed. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command during the setting change and displays a message indicating that the setting is being changed on the display device 41, or the speakers 19a, 1
Sound is output from 9b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the setting change, and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after the setting change preparation (step S33 to step S36) or after the setting confirmation preparation (step S49, step S50). In step S37, the control unit sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the game machine 10 outputs the security signal at least until the security signal control timer is timed up.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation. By setting the output of the security signal in step S37, the game machine 10 makes it possible to grasp from the outside the execution of the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting.

After enabling the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S).
39). The control unit sets step S5 when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off.
The process proceeds to step 5, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power failure occurs, with the interrupt enabled in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power failure has occurred, the process prohibits interrupts (step S4).
1) Perform the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S42).
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S45) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
), Then the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and then the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is on. In step S48, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Step S49 and step S50 are processes related to setting confirmation preparation. Step S4
In 9, the control unit performs a process of setting the flag in the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine 10 is confirming the setting. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the setting is being confirmed, and the setting confirmation mode is in progress when the setting is not being confirmed. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S50, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being confirmed to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command whose setting is being confirmed. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command for confirming the setting, displays a message indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the effect control device 3
00 receives the command under confirmation of the setting, and notifies that the setting is being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. After this, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when the control unit determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not ON, the control unit executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. The control unit proceeds to step S52 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, and proceeds to step S58 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on. That is, the game machine 10 proceeds to execute the process related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the activation detection accompanied by the pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and R
The process for power failure recovery proceeds to the execution by the activation detection without pressing the AM initialization switch 112.

Next, the process related to RAM initialization performed in step S52 and subsequent steps will be described. R
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM area other than the set value to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S52).
Step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear start address 2 as the start address at the time of RAM clear (see the memory map 111M in FIG. 13), and stores the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area). Clear the data in our clear target area (game control work area) to zero.

Since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data of the clear target area, they are cleared by zero clearing the data of the clear target area.

In step S54, the control unit transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs effect control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command at the time of RAM initialization, displays a message informing that the RAM has been initialized on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM and notifies that the RAM has been initialized by the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 4.
6. Notify by the board effect device 44.

Further, when the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off after executing the process (step S38 to step S40) related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting, step S55 is performed. Execute. After disabling interrupts (step S55), the control unit transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (step S55).
56).

As a result, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the setting is being changed, which is started by receiving the command during the setting change, or the notification that the setting is being confirmed, which is started by receiving the command during the setting confirmation. ..

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and determines whether or not the setting change mode is in progress (step S57). When the control unit is in the setting change mode, step S5
Proceed to step 2 to execute the process related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, if the control unit is not in the setting change mode, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes a process related to power failure recovery.

In step S58, the control unit executes the power failure recovery process. In the power failure recovery process, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized, and it is determined whether or not the special figure game is in high probability by referring to the special figure status, and the special figure game is in high probability. This includes a process of saving the on-information in the high-probability notification flag area and saving the on-data of the high-probability notification LED in the segment area.

The area to be initialized in the power failure recovery process is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, a setting change mode flag, a setting confirmation mode flag, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In the power failure recovery process, the busy signal status area for storing the status of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the status of the payout busy signal is determined. It is an indefinite state indicating that it is not. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In step S59, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command,
Send multiple commands such as probability information command, probability setting value information command, and screen specification command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-designated command means that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both normally being processed (during fluctuation, during jackpot (first special game state)).
It is a command to command the display of the customer waiting demo screen when it is in a small hit (a state that is neither of the second special game states), and in other cases, it commands the display of the recovery screen. Command to do.

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial value) are extracted. After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the value random number and the hit symbol initial value random number (step S61), the interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Here, the control unit once disables the interrupt (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits the interrupt after executing the performance display editing process (step S66). The performance display editing process is a process related to base calculation and display, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive the processing result more quickly. As a result, the game machine 10 guarantees the derivation of the processing result of the performance display editing process by the time the game state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 unless a power failure occurs. Specifically, when a power failure has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number update processing, performance display editing processing, and power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing).

Then, the interrupt is permitted before the initial value random number update process (step S63) (step S).
66) As a result, if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be waited for by the initial value random number update process, which will put pressure on the interrupt process. Can be avoided.

Similarly, interrupts are disabled before the performance display editing process (step S65) (step S6).
4) As a result, the performance display editing process is executed in preference to the timer interrupt.
It is possible to avoid pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in an integrated manner and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means.
In a game machine including an effect control device (300, etc.), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on. The means (game control device 100) and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And, the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

The game control device 100 has a function (second initialization process) of distinguishing between an initialization process (first initialization process) at the time of data abnormality and an initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of initialization operation. Since it has one initialization means and a second initialization means), it is possible to realize an optimum and lean initialization process according to the situation.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and
Setting operation unit that can be operated from the outside (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12)
7) and a setting changing means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit are provided to enable the setting change and the setting display unit ( The setting (set value) can be confirmed by providing the probability set value display device 136). Further, the main control means (game control device 100) uses the RAM after the standby time has elapsed.
This means that access to 111C is permitted.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution and stop of all the processes to be stopped.
The loop after step S47) and the RAM error standby process (loop in steps S31 and S32) that waits for the execution of all processes to be stopped while permitting access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S17). Make it feasible.

Here, the standby process when a power failure occurs and the standby process when a RAM is abnormal will be described. The power failure standby processing is a loop processing that is executed after the access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main processing and waits for the execution of all the processing to be stopped. Further, since the standby process when a power failure occurs is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S41 of the main process, an interrupt (timer interrupt) that is not an NMI interrupt is prohibited. The standby process when a power failure occurs is NMI.
About interrupts NMI interrupts can occur because interrupts cannot be disabled. However, since the standby process when a power failure occurs is a process executed when a power failure occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during the execution of the process. Further, the standby process when a power failure occurs is a standby process that does not accompany an abnormality notification. As a result, the game machine 10 can allocate the electric power until the power is cut off to the power failure processing. The gaming machine 10 prohibits access to the RAM during the standby process when a power failure occurs, thereby reducing the risk of changing the stored contents of the RAM due to an unstable voltage.

The RAM error standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
Further, since the RAM error standby process is executed after the interrupt is disabled in step S1 of the main process, an interrupt (timer interrupt) that is not an NMI interrupt is prohibited. Note that the standby process when a power failure occurs is N because interrupts cannot be disabled for NMI interrupts.
MI interrupts can occur. Since the RAM error standby process is a process of waiting for the power to be cut off, the risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during the execution of the process is greater than that of the power failure standby process.
However, in the RAM error standby process, since access to the RAM is permitted even if an NMI interrupt occurs, the return address can be stored in the RAM, and the risk of program runaway due to the occurrence of an NMI interrupt is small. Further, since the game machine 10 transmits the main abnormality error notification command to the effect control device 300 in step S30, the effect control device 300 performs the abnormality notification in parallel during the execution of the RAM abnormality standby process. Can be done. As a result, the game machine 10 can be expected to restart promptly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 1
1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed in the above-mentioned main process from the time when the interrupt is enabled until the interrupt is disabled (step S38 to step S41, step S38 to step S55, step S66 to step S64, step S66). To step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs in. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7).
1). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.

Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S73) are performed. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag, and determines whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. The control unit proceeds to step S75 when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress, executes the setting change / confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. The setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, the control unit proceeds to step S76 when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

In step S76, the control unit executes output processing for performing drive control and the like of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, solenoid solenoid 37c) based on the output data set in various processes.

When the launch stop signal is output in step S5 of the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the game control device 1.
The first signal indicating the launch permission status seen from 00, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status seen from the payout control device 200 are also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. Output to the control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device.
It is configured so that the game ball can be launched when both are permitted to launch.

Next, the control unit issues a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
Payout command transmission process (step S77) to output to 0, random number update process 1 (step S7)
8), the random number update process 2 (step S79) is executed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. In addition, the random number update process 2 is
This is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update or change the update cycle during the setting change.

Next, the control unit includes a start port 1 switch 36a, a start port 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, a winning port switch 35a, a large winning port switch 38a, and a specific area switch 38.
The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S80) is performed to monitor whether or not a normal signal is input from e and to monitor an error (whether or not the front frame and the glass frame are opened, etc.). In addition, the start port switch monitoring process (step S81) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) Is extracted, and the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game. The game result is pre-determined.

Next, the control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step S83) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and normal figure variation. General map game processing (step S) that performs processing related to the display game
84) is executed.

Next, a segment LED provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game (for example, LE of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50)
Segment LED editing process (step S85) that drives D) to display the desired content.
), Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S86) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S87) is performed. Then, the external information editing process (step S88) and the performance display device control process (step S89) for setting the signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer are performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the setting change / confirmation process executed by the control unit in step S75 of the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process of the first embodiment.

In step S91, the control unit outputs the set value display data during the setting change or setting confirmation. As a result, the game machine 10 can display the set value during the setting change or the set value during the setting confirmation on the probability setting value display device 136. The control unit may output the setting value display data for turning off the probability setting value display device 136 when the setting is not being changed or the setting is being confirmed, or a setting indicating that the setting is not being changed or the setting is being confirmed. The value display data may be output.

The control unit outputs the set value display data by saving the set value display data in the probability set value display data area and saving the initial value (for example, 100 ms) in the probability set value extinguishing timer area. The probability set value extinguishing timer area is an area for providing a blank display on the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the probability set value display device 136 can perform a blank display every time there is a set value change operation (input from the set value change switch 126).

In step S92, the control unit determines whether or not the security signal control timer has timed up. The control unit proceeds to step S94 when the security signal control timer has timed up, and proceeds to step S93 when the security signal control timer has not timed up. In step S93, the control unit updates the security signal control timer (““
1 "Decrement). In step S94, the control unit outputs on-data of the security signal and turns off other signal outputs. That is, the control unit updates the security signal control timer and outputs the on-data of the security signal during the update, but outputs the on-data of the security signal even if the security signal control timer times out. As a result, the control unit guarantees the on-data output of the security signal during the period until the security signal control timer times out. For example, the control unit sets 128 ms in the security signal control timer in step S37 of the main process, so that 128 ms is set.
The on-data output of security signals of ms or more is guaranteed. The security signal control timer is set to a value that is at least twice the shortest output time in which the security signal can be detected by an external device. For example, when the shortest output time during which a security signal can be detected by an external device is 50 ms, a value that is more than twice the shortest output time is the shortest 100 ms, and the security signal control timer is 128 ms by adding a margin time to this. Is set.

In step S95, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and determines whether or not the setting change mode is in progress. The control unit proceeds to step S96 when the setting change mode is in progress, and ends the setting change / confirmation process when the setting change mode is not in progress.

In step S96, the control unit determines whether or not there is an operation input (switch input) of the set value change switch 126 read in the input process of step S73 of the timer interrupt process.
The control unit proceeds to step S97 when there is an operation input of the setting value change switch 126, and ends the setting change / confirmation process when there is no operation input of the setting value change switch 126. In addition, it should be noted
The game machine 10 includes the set value change switch 126, but when the set value change switch 126 is not provided, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be used as the set value change switch instead of the set value change switch 126. In that case, in step S96, the control unit may determine whether or not there is an operation input (switch input) of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the input process of step S73 of the timer interrupt process.

In step S97, the control unit increments the set value by "1" from "0" to "5".
Update cyclically within the range of. The set value is set to 6 levels from "0" to "5", but the setting value is not limited to this, and may be 3 levels, 10 levels, or the like. After updating the set value, the control unit
End the setting change / confirmation process.

Next, the memory map of the RAM 111C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of the game control device of the first embodiment. Memory map 111
M is a memory map of the RAM 111C. The RAM 111C sets a game control work area, a game control stack area, a state display work area, and a state display stack area in order from the beginning of the memory. Further, the RAM 111C clearly separates the game control stack area and the status display work area by setting an unused area of 16 bytes or more between the game control stack area and the status display work area. Also, RAM1
In 11C, an unused area is set after the status display stack area, but the state display stack area may be set so as to include the end of the memory without providing the unused area. Further, the RAM 111C may set an unused area between the game control work area and the game control stack area, or between the state display work area and the state display stack area.

Since the probability setting value area is arranged at the beginning of the game control work area, the RAM clear start address 1 covers all the game control work areas (game control work area) and the game control stack area. To do. Further, the RAM clear start address 2 targets the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability set value area. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 targets the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability set value area, the fluctuation pattern random number area, and the initial value random number area. Further, all of the RAM clear start address 1, the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM clear start address 3 target the area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the power failure inspection area 2 and the checksum area.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S76) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output process of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the segment output port (third output port 134c) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (3rd output port 134c).
Step S101). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port (first output port 134a) that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S102).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S103), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The line output data is acquired (step S104). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LEDs_d1 to LED_d18 of the batch display device 50, round display, special figure 1 hold display, special figure 1 symbol display, special figure 2 symbol display, normal symbol display,
There is a normal figure hold display and a status display (game status display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S105), and the combined data is output to the digit / external information output port (fourth output port 134d) for digit output and external information output (step S106). ). The external information synthesized in step S105 is "door / frame opening" and "security signal".

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S107), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port (third output port 134c) for segment output (3rd output port 134c). Step S108).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S109). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "design confirmation number signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". "Signal" etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S110), and the combined data is used as an external information / launch permission signal output port (fifth output port 134e) for external information output and launch permission signal output. Is output to (step S111).

Next, the off output data of the probability setting value display is set. That is, the probability set value display device 1
Probability setting value display output port for outputting 36 probability setting value display data (second output port 13)
Off-data is output (reset) to 4b) (step S112).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S1).
13). If the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S113; Y), the process proceeds to step S114, and if the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S113; N), the process proceeds to step S115.

When the probability set value display permission flag is set, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is loaded from the set value display data area in the RWM (step S114).
In step S115, the probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (second output port 134b).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S116). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S117).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S118). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 7 is used.
The combined data is output to the test signal output port 4 on 0 (step S119). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 ( Step S120).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S121). The test signal output data loads the probability set value display data (for example, 7-segment data) corresponding to the probability set value from the set value display data area in the RWM, but the probability set value can be confirmed. If there is, it may be a probability setting value (for example, a numerical value from 1 to 6) or data in other formats.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S122). When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S122; Y), the process proceeds to step S123, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S122; N), the process proceeds to step S124.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the test signal output data of the loaded probability setting value and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S123).
In step S124, the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 6 on the relay board 70, and the output process is completed.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S131). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S131; Y), the process proceeds to step S139, and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S131; N), the process proceeds to step S132. Step S
In 132, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S132; Y), the process proceeds to step S139. If the probability set value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S132; N), the process proceeds to step S133.

Next, the winning port monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number into which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the large winning opening switch 38a (count switch) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) or the like. (Data indicating the bit position and the like in the signal port is stored) is prepared (step S133). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S134) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) to win the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in Fuden is prepared (step S135), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S135) is performed to monitor for illegal winning and detect normal winning. Step S136) is executed.

Next, a winning slot switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, a winning slot switch that can always win a prize (
Here, the winning opening monitoring table of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S137), and the winning number counter update process for updating the winning number (step S137).
Step S138) is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals for which the error status of the game machine 10 should be monitored is to be monitored this time is set to "0". To update in the range of "3" (step S139). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. Prepare the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab (step S140).
). Then, a game machine state check process (step S141) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a game machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S142). Then, a game machine state check process (step S143) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S144).
If the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S144; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the game machine condition monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.
There is no monitoring target for the game machine status. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S144; Y), the game machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the state scan counter. The game machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S145).
.. Then, the game machine state check process (step S) for determining whether or not an error has occurred.
146) is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S147) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Note that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed in a 16 ms cycle.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S77) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. The winning number counter area includes the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2. The winning number counter area 1 is a storage area that can store a 2-byte counter. The winning number counter area 1 is composed of, for example, a 3-prize ball counter, a 10-prize ball counter, and a 14-prize ball counter, and each winning number counter can store up to 65535 prizes. The winning number counter area 2 is a storage area that can store a 1-byte counter. The prize number counter area 2 includes 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, and each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes. In checking the count number of the prize number counter area, the above-mentioned counters are checked in order from the top (from the three prize ball counters) by updating the address of the prize number counter area in step S202 or the like described later.

In FIG. 16, the left column is a process for updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output.
The right column is the process of sending the payout command. In the payout command transmission process, among the counters in the plurality of prize number counter areas 2 provided for each number of prize balls (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), the counters to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201;
N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202).
), It is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y),
The count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 (for example, 3 or 10 described above, (Any of 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). In step S209, the subtraction result is "0".
If it is determined to be greater than or equal to (step S209; Y), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is set to "+1".
Update (step S210) and save the subtraction result in the prize ball remaining number area (step S211).
).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is output updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 scheduled payouts, and the payout board (payout control device 2) is output.
From 00), one pulse is output for every 10 payouts.

Next, in the determination of step S203, all the checks are completed (step S203;
If it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N) in the determination of Y) or the determination of step S209, the payout command transmission timer value is not "0". The value of is updated to "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213).
), When it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the port status but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud". "Medium", "Abnormality of payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor payout balls)", "Payout insufficient error", "Payout excess error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count in (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S2).
18), the payout number command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S2).
20). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

In step S213, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S.
If it is determined that 213; N), the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y) in step S214, the check of the entire area is completed in step S217 (step S217). When it is determined to be Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

As can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and subsequent steps depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses. I have sent it since then. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S68) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) is prepared (step A101), the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed, and the starting port 1 is won. Whether or not it is determined (step A103).

When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103;
In N), the process proceeds to the process of step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that the starting port 1 has won a prize (step A1).
In 03; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a normal electric support state, a big hit, etc.) to hit right (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the state is not the predetermined state to hit right (step A10).
In 4; N), the process proceeds to the process of step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. To do. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment
In the case of 0, except for the normal electric support state, the starting port 1 is hardly won unless it is left-handed, and if the starting port 1 is won in the predetermined state where it should be right-handed, it is the predetermined state where it should be right-handed. However, since it can be presumed that the player has been hit left, a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 is configured to give a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 (step A10).
7), the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) is performed.
Next, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A1).
09), the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize in the starting port 2 (step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111;
In N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that the starting port 2 has won a prize (step A1).
In 11; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is in the normal power support state (time saving state) (step A112), and if it is determined that the game state is not in the normal power support state (step A112; N), a big hit is being made. It is determined whether or not there is (step A113). Further, in step A113, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the final variation of the normal electric support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the final change of the normal power support is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and an effect command setting process (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal power support state, the big hit, or the final fluctuation of the normal power support, it should be left-handed, so the process of transmitting the left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, when it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric support state is in (step A112; Y), and when it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is in progress (step A113; Y), the general electric support is final in step A114. If it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress (step A114; Y), and if the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

When the process proceeds to step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the start port 2 (step A117), the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.

If it is determined in step A111 that the start port 2 has won a prize, for example, before executing step A112, it is normal for the public electric machine to be illegal (even though the normal variable winning device 37 is closed). A step is provided to determine whether or not there is an illegality in which a prize is detected in the variable winning device 37), and if it is determined that this general electric power illegality is occurring, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and subsequent steps. The configuration may be set so that the second start memory (start memory of special figure 2) is not generated any more when there is an illegality of the electric power.

The hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
, A110), the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variable winning device 37).
), The non-winning information of the start port to be monitored is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, and monitoring is performed. When there is an input to the target start port switch, the random number latch register status is read, the jackpot random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded, and the monitoring target start of the start port 1 and start port 2 is started. Set the information with the winning of the mouth. In the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port switch to be monitored is determined. If there is no input in, the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A).
The details of 108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a special figure start port 1 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 1 switch 36a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the number of times the start port signal 1 is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the winning start port 1 switch 36a to be monitored is output to the external management device of the game machine 10 is output. It is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A133).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is set to RWM.
The start port signal of 1 is saved in the output frequency region (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y),
It passes step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment,
A value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 1 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value is "0".
, And it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the number of special figures 1 reserved for update corresponding to the start port 1 switch 36a to be monitored (special figure 1).
It is determined whether or not (the number of start-up memories of) is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4) (step A).
135). If the number of special figure 1 hold items to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated. When the number of special figures 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) (step A135; Y). Step A136), the number of special figures 1 held to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A143), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. After that, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A145).
The effect command setting process (step A146) is performed to end the special figure start port 1 switch process.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of starting memories that are the execution right of. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
The details of 118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 2 switch 37a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 2 switch processing, first, the start port signal 2 output number of times, which is the number of times to output information on the number of times of winning to the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded ( Step A151), update the loaded value by "+1" (step A152)
), It is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), step A
It passes 154 and proceeds to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 2 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0".
It is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4) (step A155).
If the number of special figure 2 hold items to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated. When the number of special figures 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A155; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) is set ( Step A156), the number of special figures 2 held to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 2 is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of Special Figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A163), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A164) is performed. After that, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A165).
The effect command setting process (step A166) is performed to end the special figure start port 2 switch process.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a starting memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the starting prize storage means (RAM111C) is a starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37).
Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball are stored as the second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability medium) (step A171). If it is determined in step A171 that the probability is high (step A171; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A171 that the probability is not high (step A171; N).
), It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that a big hit is being made (step A172; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that the jackpot is not hit (step A172; N).
In), a jackpot determination process (step A173) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A17).
4). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A174; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) is displayed. It is set (step A175), the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 is acquired (step A176), the process proceeds to step A181, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A174; N), the small hit determination process (step A177) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A178). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A178)
In (N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step A180), the process proceeds to the process of step A181, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A178; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. Is set (step A179), the process proceeds to the process of step A181, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A181, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any one of step A176, step A179, or step A180 is prepared (step A181), and the effect command setting process (step). A18
Do 2). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A183) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A184) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern (variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. A command is prepared (step A185), an effect command setting process (step A186) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination process is completed.

The special figure information setting process in step A183 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A184 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing (special figure 1 normal processing or special figure 2 normal processing described later). It is the same as the processing. That is, when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special figure type is special figure 1, the processes of steps A183 and A184 are the special figure 1 information setting process and the special figure 1 variation described later. It is the same as the pattern setting process, and when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, so the processes of steps A183 and A184 are the special figure 2 information described later. It is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory can be obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, the display device 41.
It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the screen.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (step S82) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 1 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game).
Set the display of. In the special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). .. When not in the big hit or small hit in Special Figure 2 (step A1)
In N), a large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step A1; Y) and the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. Special figure 1 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Special figure 1 Refer to the above. Set the game sequence branch table in the register (step A5).
, The branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Fig. 1 Setting information necessary to perform processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Normal processing (step A8)
To do.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step A9).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big hit of each big hit. Setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern and fanfare /
Set the information required to perform processing during the interval Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (
Step A10) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", set the opening time of the large winning opening, update the number of opening times, set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the large winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A11) to be performed is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening Perform the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set while the final round is used. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing. Do it.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Perform the small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A15) to set the information necessary for the operation.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit medium process (step A16) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (step S83) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game).
Set the display of. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). .. When not in the big hit or small hit in Special Figure 1 (step A)
In 31; N), a large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38
Performs the process of monitoring the detection of the game ball in.

Next, when it is determined that the hit is in the big hit or the small hit in FIG. 1 (step A31; Y).
When the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, step A33
If the game processing timer of Special Figure 2 is not "0", it is updated to "-1" (step A3).
3). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and special figure 2 in RWM. Special figure 2 which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer. The timer value for length variation (for example, 6) is stored in the game processing timer area.
(0000 msec) is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35;
In Y), a special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in a register (step A38), and the special figure 2 game processing number is used using the table. Acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to (step A39).
.. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A4).
7).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are set. Fig. 2 Setting information required to perform processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Normal processing (step A4)
8).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step A49).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or
Perform special figure 2 display processing (step A50) for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot and setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. The fanfare / interval processing (step A51) to be performed is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A52), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, while the final round is used. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening (step A53) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing. Do it.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step A54) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Small hit fanfare middle processing that sets the information necessary for performing (
Step A55) is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit medium processing (step A56) is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A57) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step A58) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure 2 game is performed. End the process. On the other hand, in step A34, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, when the time is not up or when the processing of step A37 is completed, step A59 Move to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs the initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit is V
Allows the display circuit in the DP 312 (not shown) to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each game machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300.
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (for example, the effect flag area (the storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of the brightness, volume, etc. of the LED and display device 41, and
This is a process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. Random number update processing is, for example, r
This is a process in which the pseudo-random number is updated at least once for each control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the land function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is V
This is a process for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a V blank interrupt (
It is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of a V-sync interrupt. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit follows the command set in step D23 to VDP3.
Instruct 12 to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes sound control processing. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of voice from speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces a special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of balls to be rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

[Step D31] The control unit executes the information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information related to game performance to a player.
The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter, step D1.
The processing of steps 8 to D31 is repeatedly executed. That is, steps D18 to D
Reference numeral 31 denotes a loop process (3) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.
In some cases, it is called main loop processing).

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (directing command) is MODE data (1 byte) and ACTIO.
It has a configuration including N data (1 byte), and effect commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

The process of receiving commands from the main board is "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown).
It is done by. That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is normal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the stored data. In the description of the control process, the term "store" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a).
Is set to. Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (the time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", and if the number of command receptions is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the number of command receptions is "0". If so, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, "loading" data in the control process means RAM (the effect control device 300 of this example).
Means retrieving data from RAM 322 or RAM 311a).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, step D41
Immediately after the execution of, "A = B". Immediately after the execution of step D43, "A = AB ="
The normal movement is "0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a game control device (
Since the command reception interrupt from the main board) 100 is given the highest priority without disabling the interrupt, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, step D43
Then, a subtraction process called "AB" is performed. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit sets the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. In addition, "0" to "31" here
The range of corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (eg, "32").

[Step D46] Whether or not the control unit has completed copying the commands for the number of received commands (
That is, whether or not step D44 and step D45 are repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions) is determined. The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the number of commands received has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit sets the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process to MODE and the lower byte to ACT.
Separately and memorize each. In the case of a variable system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the data of the upper byte stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern and AC.
The low-order byte data stored as T commands the latter half fluctuation pattern.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit steps D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range.
If the MODE value is not in the normal range, the received command analysis process is terminated. In addition, it should be noted
The value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of this ACT are predetermined ACTION check tables (
It is defined in (not shown), and in step D53, it is checked whether the separated ACT value is within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit, and if it is within the range, it is determined to be the normal range (at this point, the tooth described later). I haven't been able to check for omissions).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value is the correct combination with respect to the separated MODE value. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined by using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

The determination of whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination is executed including the toothlessness check of whether or not the ACT value is a normal combination for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command We are comparing and confirming whether is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if any of them matches.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, the variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the jackpot production, and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command that commands information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this single command can take is the single command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and receives it when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. End the command analysis process.

The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for the look-ahead effect. When any of the processes of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 is completed, the received command analysis process is completed.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a start winning memory in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding).
In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the variable display game corresponding to (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will be) will be a big hit when the game is subsequently executed, the player will be notified in advance of the start winning memory, etc. It is a production that is performed in a mode different from the usual one. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that notifies in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, with respect to the calculation and display of the base as the game performance performed by the game machine 10, FIG. 26
, FIG. 27 will be described. Here, the base is the ball output rate in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is a state that is neither a time saving state nor a big hit game state (big hit state), and more generally, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is a normal probability state (low probability). State) is a state. The ball output rate is the number of balls paid out per 100 out balls. Therefore, the number of out balls in the normal game state is set to Nout, and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Ns.
When afe is used, the base B is calculated by the formula B = (Nsafe ÷ Nout) × 100. The number of out balls is the number of balls launched into the game area and entered the out port or the winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-mentioned out ball detection switch signal), and is the number of out balls or simply. Sometimes called out. Further, the number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be referred to as the number of payout balls, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As described above in the description of FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the game machine 10 has a performance display device 13
5 is provided. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a performance display device which is a display means of the base of the first embodiment and a storage area for the base, and FIG. 26 (1) shows a display unit of the performance display device 135. 2) shows the storage area for the base. Further, FIG. 27 shows a display example by the performance display device of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 26 (1), the performance display device 135 is composed of four 4-digit 7-segment LEDs provided side by side, and a dot point (small circular light emission) is located at the lower right of each 7-segment LED. Part) is provided. 4-digit 7-segment LED for base display
Of these, the two digits on the left are the identification segment that displays the measurement time of the base (whether or not it is being measured and the order in which it was measured), and the two digits on the right are the ratio segments that display the base value. ing. As shown in FIG. 27, in the 7-segment LED of the performance display device 135, "B" is actually displayed in the form of lowercase "b".

The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A which is a control unit) has a RAM 111C.
A storage area for a base as shown in FIG. 26 (2) is set in the RWM such as, and is used for calculating the base and displaying the base. That is, the game control device 100 sets "the number of out balls" for storing the cumulative value of the number of out balls and "the number of payout balls" for storing the cumulative value of the number of payout balls as the base calculation storage area. Further, as a base storage area for storing the calculated value of the base, "base (BL)", "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)" are set.

Here, the "base (BL)" is an area for storing the base being measured, and the "base (B1)"
) ”Is an area for storing the base measured one time ago,“ base (B2) ”is an area for storing the base measured two times before, and“ base (B3) ”is an area for storing the base measured three times before. It is an area to store the base. That is, it is an area for storing the oldest measured value (calculated value) of the base among the storage areas in which the "base (B3)" is set.

The above-mentioned storage area for base calculation and the storage value of the base storage area are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (the power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112) except for the abnormality of RWM. It is desirable to have a configuration that retains memory without clearing zero at times.

The game control device 100 uses the performance display device 135 except when the performance display device 135 displays the setting content of the probability setting (setting of any of the five stages) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above. Display the base. In the first embodiment described above, the mode in which the setting contents of the probability setting are displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted so that the performance display device 135 also functions as the probability setting value display device. In that case, the performance display device 13 may be used.
In each of the above modes, the setting contents are displayed according to No. 5, and the base is displayed by the performance display device 135 in other modes.

The game control device 100 performs the calculation and display of the base as an example as follows. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 first confirms all segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the performance display device 135 for a predetermined time (for example, 5).
Blink all (for seconds).

After that, the game control device 100 is in the BL display state as shown in FIG. 27 (1), in FIG. 27 (2).
), The B2 display state as shown in FIG. 27 (3), and the B3 display state as shown in FIG. 27 (4) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). To do. That is, in the steady state after the power is turned on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then B3.
The display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and so on, and the four states are switched in order and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control device 100 displays "bL" (BL) indicating that the measurement time of the base is being measured (this time) in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base" in the ratio segment. (BL) ”value (or“ --- ”) is displayed. Further, in the B1 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b1" (B1) indicating that the measurement time of the base is one time before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B1)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed. Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 has a measurement time of 2 based on the identification segment.
"B2" (B2) indicating that it is the previous time is displayed, and the value (or "----") of the base storage area "base (B2)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In addition, the game control device 1 is displayed in the B3 display state.
For 00, "b3" (B3) indicating that the measurement time of the base is three times before is displayed in the identification segment, and the value (or "----") of the base storage area "base (B3)" is displayed in the ratio segment. ) Is displayed.

On the other hand, for the purpose of calculating the base, the game control device 100 sets the base calculation storage area "every time an out ball is detected (that is, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output) in the normal game state after activation. The memory value of "the number of out balls" is increased by the value corresponding to the number of detected out balls, and every time there is a prize in the winning opening of the game ball in the normal game state (or the prize ball is paid out based on the winning). Equivalent to the number of payout balls (or the number of actually paid out prize balls detected based on the signal from the payout control device 200) that generated the stored value of the "number of payout balls" in the storage area for base calculation. Increase by the value you want. Further, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-mentioned formula every time the stored value of the “out ball number” or the “paid ball number” in the base calculation storage area changes, and the calculation result is used as the base B. Overwrite the "base (BL)" of the base storage area as the latest value.

When the storage value of the "out ball number" in the base calculation storage area reaches the specified number of measurement (for example, 60,000), the game control device 100 assumes that one measurement is completed and performs the following measurement. It is configured to perform processing at the end. In the processing at the end of this measurement, the value of the base storage area "base (B2)" at that time is used as the base storage area "base (B3)".
And the value of the base storage area "base (B1)" at that time is changed to the base storage area "
Overwrites "base (B2)", overwrites the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" at that time with the base storage area "base (B1)", and further overwrites the value of the base calculation storage area "out sphere". Clear the stored values of "Number" and "Number of balls to be paid out" and reset to zero. As a result, the base value up to 3 times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored and retained.

Then, when the game control device 100 is turned on for the first time (base calculation storage area "out number of balls""
In the period A in which the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" is less than the predetermined calculation start number (for example, the predetermined number of less than 300), in each display state, the identification segment Characters indicating the measurement time of the base such as "bL", "b1", etc. are blinked and displayed, and in the ratio segment, "----" (a state in which only the horizontally long segment in the center is made to emit light) is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 (4). It is displayed to notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

Next, when the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 shifts the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialize (clear to zero) and start the first measurement.

Then, in the period B from the start of the first measurement until the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches the measured number (for example, 60,000), the game control device 100 is in the BL display state. Blinks or lights up "bL", and the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In period B, other display states (
In the B1 to B3 display state), a character indicating the measurement time of the base such as "b1" ... Is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "----" is displayed in the ratio segment to notify that the measurement is not performed.

The display of "bL" in the identification segment in the BL display state is the storage area for base calculation "
When the stored value of the "out ball number" is less than the measured number, a blinking display is displayed, and when the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches the measured number, a lighting display is displayed. Further, the blinking cycle of the blinking display in the identification segment and the ratio segment is, for example, 0.6 seconds, of which 0.3 seconds for lighting and 0.3 seconds for extinguishing. Further, when the stored value of the "out number of balls" reaches the number of measured pieces (for example, 60,000 pieces) and the period B ends, the above-mentioned processing at the end of the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100 refers to the period B for performing the first measurement, the period C for performing the second measurement, the period D for performing the third measurement, the period E for performing the fourth measurement, and so on. The measurement is performed continuously as described above. Since the calculated values of the bases of the past three times are stored after the time when the third measurement is completed, the base measurement time such as "b1" in the identification segment is set in all the B1 to B3 display states. The indicated characters are lit and displayed, and the value of the corresponding base storage area (any of "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)") is displayed in the ratio segment.

Note that FIGS. 27 (1) to 27 (4) show an example of specific display in each display state in the above period D after the second measurement is completed. In this case, there is no measurement result 3 times before, so
In FIG. 27 (4), which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “----” (display indicating the unmeasured state).

Further, in FIG. 27 (1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is "58".
Indicates that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58.
Further, in FIG. 27 (2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "67", and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured one time before is 67. It is shown that. Further, in FIG. 27 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is ".
It is "49", and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured two times before is 49.
It shows that. If the base value is 100 or more, the ratio segment is displayed as "99." (the number 99 is displayed in the ratio segment and the dot point of the last digit is lit), so that the ratio segment is 100 or more. Notify that.

The base value is generally in the normal range of, for example, about 25 to 35, and is abnormal even if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range, and this abnormality is called a base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 27 described above shows as an example a state in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous, and in the normal case, the identification segment is a numerical value within the normal range of about 25 to 35. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 is, for example, a measurement value of the past three times (B above) stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, “base (B3)”).
When all of the ratio segment display values in the 1 to B3 display states are out of the normal range and are abnormal.
Assuming that a base abnormality has occurred, a signal indicating that a base abnormality has occurred is transmitted to an external device (hall computer), for example, a game hall.

A signal (information) indicating this base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the effect control device 300 that receives this signal notifies the display area of the display device 41 of the base abnormality. An image (for example, an image corresponding to the error notification image 807) may be displayed. In addition, since this base error may occur when fraud is performed, it is desirable to set it to the above-mentioned strong error.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the measured value of the base is stored and displayed up to the past 3 times, but the number of the base storage areas is increased to store and display the past 4 times or more. It may be configured to be used. In addition, although the storage area for base calculation is set only for the one being measured, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing the number of out balls and the number of payout balls, which are the basis for calculating the past measured values. Good.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment
It is configured to have a plurality of game performances (for example, a probability of being used for a lottery of a game (probability of deriving an advantageous state (big hit) for a player)), and the game performance can be changed by changing the setting. In the game machine 10, the game performance is set in a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages of "1" to "6"), and the setting is changed by setting (setting) the setting value corresponding to each stage. The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment suggests the setting of the gaming performance (set setting value) to the player.

First, a configuration example of a display screen in the display device 41 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a display screen of the display device according to the second embodiment.

The display screen 500 has two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display area 505a, a hold display 505b, a hold digest display area 506a, and a hold digest. Display 506b is included in the display content.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 501 as the first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 502 as the second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 501 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. Large design group 501
Includes the left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R. The left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R of the display screen 500 are all stopped, indicating that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 starts to fluctuate in the order of the left symbol 501L, the right symbol 501R, and the middle symbol 501C (or the left symbol 501L, the right symbol 501R, and the middle symbol 501C at the same time), and the left symbol 501L and the right symbol 501R. , Middle symbol 501C is stopped in this order (including temporary stop). Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 501 has the left symbol 501L and the right symbol 501R.
The reach mode is formed by and, and the jackpot mode can be formed by waiting for the middle symbol 501C to stop.

Symbols that make up the large symbol group 501 (left symbol 501L, middle symbol 501C, and right symbol 501R)
Is mainly due to the decorative design with high design.
The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect of the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 is
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 502 of the display screen 500 are all stopped, indicating that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502
Compared with the large symbol group 501, it is displayed smaller and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

As a result, the game machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 502 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 501, and facilitate the grasp of the game state of the player.

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. For example, the hold memory of the special figure 1 game is generated when a prize is entered in the start winning opening 36. The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. For example, the hold memory of the special figure 2 game is generated when a prize is given to the ordinary variable winning device 37.

The hold display area 505a is an area that clearly indicates the range in which the hold display 505b is displayed. The hold display 505b can clearly indicate the number of hold memories (the number of hold start memories) of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold memory depending on the display mode. The number of reserved storages displayed by the holding display 505b is either the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 1 holding number display 503 or the number of holding storages displayed by the special drawing 2 holding number display 504, depending on the game state. It corresponds to the total number of both.

The number of hold storages displayed by the hold display 505b is a value from "0" to "4", and the number of hold storages exceeding this value is excluded from the display target. In the game machine 10, even if the hold display 505b excludes a part or all of the hold memory from being displayed, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 and the special figure 2 hold number display 5
With 04, it is possible to guarantee an accurate display of the number of reserved memories.

The reserved digestion display area 506a is an area that clearly indicates the range in which the reserved digestion display 506b is displayed. The hold digestion display 506b can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. That is, the game machine 10 can perform the hold notice effect by using the hold display 505b and the hold digestion display 506b. The hold notice effect is an aspect of the look-ahead effect performed by using the hold display 505b and the hold digestion display 506b.

On the display screen 500, the number of reserved memory of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 hold number display 503 is "3".
Since the number of reserved storages of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special drawing 2 holding number display 504 is "0", the number of reserved storages indicated by the holding display 505b is also "3". Further, the display screen 500 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped by the hold digestion display 506b.

Further, the game machine 10 can have different modes of variation during the variation display for the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. For example, the game machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 when the large symbol group 501 is vertically scrolled. Further, even if the game machine 10 may update the symbols asynchronously between the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

Next, the suggestion of the set value (setting of the game performance) set by the game machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. In the second embodiment, the game machine 10 executes an effect (suggestion effect) that suggests a set value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a reach occurs) during execution of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the second embodiment.

The game machine 10 starts a special figure variation display game (design variation). The display screen 510 of FIG. 29 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 500, and shows a display screen after starting the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 510, the large symbol group 501 (left symbol 501L, middle symbol 501C, and right symbol 501R) and the small symbol group 502 (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) have variable symbols, and the special symbol variation display game. Indicates that the variable display is in progress (the symbol is changing) (the variable display has started).

Further, on the display screen 510, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 reduces the hold number by "1" from the state of the display screen 500 and displays "2" with the start of the special figure change display game. ing. Further, on the display screen 510, the number of icons (holding start memory) indicating the hold memory to be displayed on the hold display 505b is changed from the state of the display screen 500 to "with the start of the special figure variation display game." It decreases by 1 ”indicating that the number of reserved memories is“ 2 ”. Further, on the display screen 510, the hold digestion display 506b displays an icon indicating the hold memory during digestion, indicating that the special figure change display game is in the change display.

Next, the game machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the left symbol 501L and the right symbol 501R to form a reach. The display screen 511 of FIG. 29 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 510, and shows a display screen in a state where reach is established (reach is formed) during the special figure variation display game. Display screen 5
11 includes the reach display 512 in the display content. The reach display 512 clearly indicates that a reach has occurred. On the display screen 511, the large symbol group 501 is the left symbol 501L and the right symbol 50.
With 1R displaying "7", it swings and temporarily stops, and the middle symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.
Indicates that a reach with a reach symbol of "7" has occurred.

Next, the game machine 10 notifies (notifies) that the suggestion of the set value is executed when the reach occurs. The display screen 513 of FIG. 29 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 511, and shows a display screen (display screen during the suggestion execution notice) for notifying the execution of the suggestion of the set value.
On the display screen 513, the large symbol group 501 swings and temporarily stops with the left symbol 501L and the right symbol 501R displaying "7", and the middle symbol 501C is a dedicated symbol "setting suggestion" (setting suggestion symbol). Indicates that the system is temporarily stopped and the state is foretelling that the suggestion of the set value is executed. In this way, the game machine 10 can make it possible for the player to know that the setting value is suggested by notifying that the setting value is suggested.

The setting suggestion symbol is one of the identification information (symbol). Further, the setting suggestion symbol may be incorporated in the symbol array in advance, or may be added in the symbol array during the variable display. It should be noted that the setting suggestion symbol is not limited to the case where it is clearly indicated to the player by displaying the temporary stop, and may be clearly indicated to the player by displaying the main stop.

Next, the game machine 10 executes an effect (suggestion effect) that suggests a set value. The display screen 514 of FIG. 30 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 513, and shows a display screen in a state where the suggestion effect has started to be executed.

The display screen 514 includes the suggestion effect display 515 in the display content. The suggestion effect display 515 displays a suggestion effect that suggests a set value. The suggestion effect display 515 is displayed in the center of the screen.
As the suggestion effect display 515 is displayed on the display screen 514, the large symbol group 501 is smaller than the state of the display screen 513 and is displayed at the upper part. In addition, the display screen 5
In 14, each symbol of the large symbol group 501 has started re-variation from the temporarily stopped state.

On the display screen 514, the suggestion effect display 515 is a team of tiger-like characters (Team A).
) And a team of tiger-like characters wearing sunglasses (Team B) will start to play against each other. Further, on the display screen 514, the suggestion effect display 515 displays icons indicating the set values "1", "3", and "5" in association with the team A, and displays the set values "2" in association with the team B. The icons indicating "4" and "6" are displayed. That is, in the suggestion effect display 515 on the display screen 514, when the team A wins, the set value of the game machine 10 is "1".
It is suggested that it is either "3" or "5", and if Team B wins the match, the set value of the game machine 10 is any of "2", "4", and "6". Suggest that.

Next, the game machine 10 suggests a set value as a result of the suggestion effect. The display screen 516 of FIG. 30 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 514, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value.
On the display screen 516, the suggestion effect display 515 displays the character "victory" in association with team A, and team A wins by displaying a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses with a facial expression corresponding to defeat. Show that you did. That is, on the display screen 516, the suggestion effect display 515 suggests that the set value of the game machine 10 is any of "1", "3", and "5".

In this way, the game machine 10 has a set value (set value set in the game machine 10 by the suggestion effect display 515.
By suggesting (setting of game performance) (by providing clues to the set value of the game machine 10), it is possible for the player to estimate the set value. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the interest.

In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to the case where the set value is "1", "3", "5", and even if the set value is not "1", "3", "5". Set values are "1", "3", "5"
It may be suggested that it is either. In this case, for example, in the game machine 10, the set values are "2", "4", rather than the suggestion that the set values are any of "1", "3", and "5".
If the probability that the suggestion of any of "6" is generated is increased, it can be suggested that the set value is not "1", "3", or "5" through a plurality of suggestion effects. In this way, the game machine 10 can adjust the difficulty of estimating the set value by allowing suggestion other than the actual set value.

Next, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect. The display screen 517 of FIG. 30 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 516, and shows a display screen in a state in which the suggestion effect is completed. Display screen 5
In 17, the suggestion effect display 515 displayed in the center of the display screen 516 disappears as the suggestion effect ends, and the large symbol group 501 is enlarged from the state of the display screen 516 and displayed from the center to the upper part. (It is in the same state as the display screen 510).

After that, after finishing the suggestion effect, the game machine 10 stops the changing symbols (large symbol, small symbol), derives the result of the special symbol variation display game, and ends the special symbol variation display game.
Next, the relationship between the set value being set and the result of the suggestion effect (suggestion content) will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the set value of the game machine and the suggested content in the second embodiment.

The table shown in FIG. 31 shows the team A associated with the above-mentioned suggestion effects (setting values "1", "3", "5" and the setting values "2", "4" in the game machine 10 having each set value. , And the production of playing against Team B associated with “6”), the probability of occurrence of each suggestion is shown.

The set value set in the game machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6". For example, the set value "1" is the lowest setting (the game performance is the lowest), and the larger the set value, the higher the setting (
The game performance will be higher).

When the above-mentioned suggestive effect occurs when the set value is "1", Pa1 (> Pb)
With the probability of 1), the suggested content becomes the set values "1", "3", "5" (Team A wins), and P
With the probability of b1 (<Pa1), the suggested content becomes the set values "2", "4", and "6" (Team B wins). That is, when the set value is "1", the team A to which the set value "1" belongs
Has a relatively high probability of deriving a winning result. As a result, the game machine 10
It is possible to infer whether the set value set in the game machine 10 belongs to team A or team B through a plurality of suggestion effects. In the game machine 10, the probability of Pb1 may be lower than that of Pa1, and the probability of occurrence may be set to 0%, for example. Further, the difference in the probability of occurrence between Pb1 and Pa1 can be adjusted to adjust the difficulty of guessing (for example, the larger the difference in the probability of occurrence, the lower the difficulty of guessing).

When the above-mentioned suggestive effect occurs when the set value is "2", Pa2 (<Pb)
With the probability of 2), the suggested content becomes the set values "1", "3", "5", and with the probability of Pb2 (> Pa2), the suggested content becomes the set value "2", "4", "6". That is, when the set value is "2", the probability that the team B to which the set value "2" belongs derives the winning result is relatively high. As a result, the game machine 10 can infer whether the set value set in the game machine 10 belongs to the team A or the team B through a plurality of suggestion effects. In the game machine 10, the probability of Pb2 may be lower than that of Pa2, and the probability of occurrence may be set to 0%, for example. Further, the game machine 10 can also adjust the estimation difficulty level by adjusting the difference in the occurrence probabilities between Pb2 and Pa2.

When the above-mentioned suggestive effect occurs when the set value is "3", Pa3 (> Pb)
With the probability of 3), the suggestion content becomes the set values "1", "3", "5", and with the probability of Pb3 (<Pa3), the suggestion content becomes the set value "2", "4", "6". That is, when the set value is "3", the probability that the team A to which the set value "3" belongs derives the winning result is relatively high. As a result, the game machine 10 can infer whether the set value set in the game machine 10 belongs to the team A or the team B through a plurality of suggestion effects. In the game machine 10, the probability of Pb3 may be lower than that of Pa3, and the probability of occurrence may be set to 0%, for example. Further, the difficulty of guessing can be adjusted by adjusting the difference in the probability of occurrence between Pb3 and Pa3.

When the above-mentioned suggestive effect occurs when the set value is "4", Pa4 (<Pb)
With the probability of 4), the suggested content becomes the set values "1", "3", "5", and with the probability of Pb4 (> Pa4), the suggested content becomes the set value "2", "4", "6". That is, when the set value is "4", the probability that the team B to which the set value "4" belongs derives the winning result is relatively high. As a result, the game machine 10 can infer whether the set value set in the game machine 10 belongs to the team A or the team B through a plurality of suggestion effects. In the game machine 10, the probability of Pb4 may be lower than that of Pa4, and the probability of occurrence may be set to 0%, for example. Further, the game machine 10 can also adjust the difficulty of guessing by adjusting the difference in the probability of occurrence between Pb4 and Pa4.

When the above-mentioned suggestive effect occurs when the set value is "5", Pa5 (> Pb)
With the probability of 5), the suggestion content becomes the set values "1", "3", "5", and with the probability of Pb5 (<Pa5), the suggestion content becomes the set value "2", "4", "6". That is, when the set value is "5", the probability that the team A to which the set value "5" belongs derives the winning result is relatively high. As a result, the game machine 10 can infer whether the set value set in the game machine 10 belongs to the team A or the team B through a plurality of suggestion effects. In the game machine 10, the probability of Pb5 may be lower than that of Pa5, and the probability of occurrence may be set to 0%, for example. Further, the difficulty of guessing can be adjusted by adjusting the difference in the probability of occurrence between Pb5 and Pa5.

When the above-mentioned suggestive effect occurs when the set value is "6", Pa6 (<Pb)
With the probability of 6), the suggested content becomes the set values "1", "3", "5", and with the probability of Pb6 (> Pa6), the suggested content becomes the set value "2", "4", "6". That is, when the set value is "6", the probability that the team B to which the set value "6" belongs derives the winning result is relatively high. As a result, the game machine 10 can infer whether the set value set in the game machine 10 belongs to the team A or the team B through a plurality of suggestion effects. In the game machine 10, the probability of Pb6 may be lower than that of Pa6, and the probability of occurrence may be set to 0%, for example. Further, the game machine 10 can also adjust the degree of difficulty of estimation by adjusting the difference in the probability of occurrence between Pb6 and Pa6.

Next, a modified example of the suggestion content in the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 shows
It is a figure which shows the modification of the suggestion content in the suggestion effect of 2nd Embodiment.
The suggestion effect display 515a shown in FIG. 32 (1) is the suggestion effect display 5 shown on the display screen 514.
This is a mode in which the characters constituting Team B are changed from 15 (see FIG. 30). Specifically, the suggestion effect display 515a shows an effect in which a team of characters such as a tiger (Team A) and a team of characters such as pigs (Team B) compete against each other.

In this way, the game machine 10 changes the impression of the suggestion effect given to the player by changing the aspect of the team (character associated with the team) without changing the combination of the set values associated with each team. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the production.

In this case, in the game machine 10, when a team of characters like a tiger and a team of characters like a tiger wearing sunglasses play against each other (suggestion effect display 515 shown on the display screen 514), the tiger When a team of such characters and a team of characters such as pigs play against each other (suggestion effect display 515a), the occurrence probability of each suggestion content may be changed. According to this, the game machine 10 can change the estimation difficulty level (suggestion reliability (accuracy)) according to the effect.

The suggestion effect display 515b shown in FIG. 32 (2) is the suggestion effect display 5 shown on the display screen 514.
This is an embodiment in which the combination of set values associated with each team is changed from 15 (see FIG. 30). Specifically, the suggestion effect display 515b associates team A with the set values "1", "2", and "3", and associates team B with the set values "4", "5", and "6". ing.

In this way, the game machine 10 changes the combination of the setting values associated with each team according to the suggestion effect, so that the set value set in the game machine 10 is gradually set based on the suggestion content of the suggestion effect a plurality of times. It can also be made speculative in detail. The game machine 10 may have a different number of set values associated with each team (for example, team A may be associated with five set values and team B may be associated with one set value).

The suggestion effect display 515c shown in FIG. 32 (3) is the suggestion effect display 5 shown on the display screen 514.
This is an embodiment in which the combination of set values associated with each team is changed from 15 (see FIG. 30). Specifically, the suggestion effect display 515c associates the team A with the set values "2" and "3".
Team B is associated with the set values "4", "5", and "6". That is, the suggestion effect display 5
In 15c, the set value "1" is not associated with any team.

In this way, the game machine 10 has a part of the set value (here, the set value "1") in the suggestion effect display.
) May not be associated with each team. Then, for example, if such a suggestion effect (a suggestion effect that does not have the possibility of suggesting the set value "1") is generated only when the set value set in the game machine 10 is not "1". The game machine 10 can also provide a clue (information that the set value is not "1") for estimating the set value regardless of the suggested result.

The suggestion effect display 515d shown in FIG. 32 (4) is the suggestion effect display 5 shown on the display screen 514.
This is an embodiment in which the combination of set values associated with each team is changed from 15 (see FIG. 30). Specifically, the suggestion effect display 515d associates team A with the set value "1" and team B.
Is associated with the set values "1" to "6". That is, in the suggestion effect display 515d, the set value "1" is associated with both teams.

In this way, the game machine 10 has a part of the set value (here, the set value "1") in the suggestion effect display.
) May be associated with both teams. According to this, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of the combination of the set values. The game machine 10 may associate a plurality of the same set values with the same team (for example, three icons indicating the set value "1" may be associated with the team A).

Next, the setting process of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the suggestion effect setting process in the second embodiment.
In the suggestion effect setting process, a new hold memory (starting memory) is performed when the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37.
Is generated, that is, the process is performed when a winning command (directing command) indicating that a pending memory is newly generated is received. The suggestion effect setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit acquires the set value set in the game machine 10. The set value is
For example, it is set when the game machine 10 is started, and the information of the set value is stored in the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300.

[Step D72] The control unit selects a table (a table in which the probability of each suggestion effect occurring and the probability of suggesting each suggestion content in each suggestion effect is set) according to the set value. To do.

[Step D73] The control unit acquires a random number.
[Step D74] The control unit determines the suggestion effect (the configuration of team A and team B, and which team wins) based on the random number and the table, sets the determined suggestion effect, and sets the suggestion effect setting process. To finish.

Next, the timing of executing the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a timing chart showing a flow of suggestion of set values in the second embodiment.
The timing chart shown in FIG. 34 (1) is a timing chart when the suggestion effect is performed within the time of the special figure variation display game. The game machine 10 executes the Nth special figure variation display game. The game machine 10 gives a suggestion execution notice (display screen 513) just before the timing t1.
). Then, the game machine 10 starts the suggestion effect in parallel with the special figure variation display game from the timing t1. After that, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect at the timing t2, and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at the timing t3.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 34 (2) is a timing chart when the suggestion effect is performed beyond the time of the special figure variation display game. The game machine 10 executes the Nth special figure variation display game. The game machine 10 gives a suggestion execution notice (display screen 5) just before the timing t1.
13). Then, the game machine 10 starts the suggestion effect from the timing t1. After that, the game machine 10 ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t3, and ends the suggestion effect at timing t4.

The above is an example of the timing of executing the suggestion effect. In this way, the game machine 10 may perform the suggestion effect only within the time of the special figure variation display game, or may exceed the time of the special figure variation display game (independent of the special figure variation display game). You may do it.

The game machine 10 is not limited to giving a suggestion execution notice on the display screen. For example, the game machine 10 may give a suggestion execution notice by sound or light in addition to or instead of the display screen.
The suggestion effect is not limited to the variable display game in which the setting suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped (stop display). For example, the game machine 10 may perform the suggestion effect in the next and subsequent special figure variation display games in which the setting suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the first modification of the second embodiment, the set value is suggested by using the hold display.

The suggestion of the set value by the game machine 10 in the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the first modification of the second embodiment.

The display screen 518 of FIG. 35 (1) is a display screen after the announcement of the execution of the suggestion of the set value (after the display screen 513), and shows the display screen in the state where the suggestion effect is started to be executed. The display screen 518 fluctuates the numbers corresponding to the set values on the hold display 505b and the hold digestion display 506b, and the suggestion effect of the set value is the hold display 505b and the hold digestion display 506b.
Indicates the state being performed in.

The display screen 519 of FIG. 35 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 518, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. On the display screen 519, the icon indicating the hold memory displayed on the hold digestion display 506b displays "4", and the icon indicating the hold memory displayed on the hold display 505b displays "2" and "6". There is. That is, the display screen 519 suggests that the set value of the game machine 10 is any of "2", "4", and "6".

By suggesting the set value using the hold display 505b and the hold digestion display 506b in this way, the game machine 10 does not interfere with the production of the special figure variation display game (without changing the screen layout). It is possible to perform the suggestion production of.

In addition, instead of suggesting the set value on the hold display 505b and the hold digestion display 506b, the game machine 10 may suggest the set value on either the hold display 505b or the hold digestion display 506b. For example, the game machine 10 repeatedly fluctuates and stops the numbers on the icon shown in the hold digestion display 506b (for example, fluctuates → stops at “4” →
Fluctuation → Stop at “2” → Fluctuation → Stop at “6”), the set values of the game machine 10 are “2”, “4”, “
It may be suggested that it is any of 6 ”.

It should be noted that the game machine 10 may perform a hold notice effect (suggestion effect that also serves as a hold notice effect) including suggestion (suggestion effect) of the set values in the hold display 505b and the hold digestion display 506b. Good.

The above is an example of suggesting a set value using the hold display by the game machine 10 in the first modification of the second embodiment. The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting a set value using the hold display independently.
It may be performed in combination with other suggestive effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the second modification of the second embodiment, the set value is suggested by using a character.

The suggestion of the set value by the game machine 10 in the second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the second modification of the second embodiment.

The display screen 520 of FIG. 36 (1) is a display screen after notifying the execution of the suggestion of the set value (after the display screen 513), and shows the display screen suggesting the set value. The display screen 520 includes a suggestion effect display 521 in the display content.

The suggestion effect display 521 displays a suggestion effect that suggests a set value. The suggestion effect display 521 displays a character as a suggestion effect suggesting a set value. The suggestion effect display 521 suggests a set value set in the game machine 10 depending on the display mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed).

On the display screen 520, the suggestion effect display 521 displays a character like a tiger, and the setting value associated with the character like a tiger is the setting value set in the game machine 10. Suggests. The set value associated with the character such as a tiger will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

The display screen 522 of FIG. 36 (2) is a display screen after notifying the execution of the suggestion of the set value (after the display screen 513), and shows a display screen suggesting the set value. On the display screen 522, the suggestion effect display 521 displays a character like a pig, and the setting value associated with the character like a pig is the setting value set in the game machine 10. Suggests. The set value associated with the character such as a pig will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Here, the character and the set value associated with the character will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the character and the suggested content in the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

The table shown in FIG. 37 shows a character, a set value (suggested content) associated with the character, and a probability that each character (suggested content) appears when the set value of the game machine 10 is "1". It shows the correspondence.

As shown in FIG. 37, the characters used for suggesting the set value include, for example, a character like a tiger, a character like a pig, and a character like a tiger wearing sunglasses.

A character like a tiger suggests that the set values are "1", "3", and "5". A character like a tiger appears with a probability of Pa (> Pb) when the set value is "1".

A character like a pig suggests that the set values are "2", "4", and "6". A character such as a pig appears with a probability of Pb (<Pa) when the set value is "1".

A tiger-like character wearing sunglasses suggests that the setting value is "6".
A character like a tiger wearing sunglasses appears only when the set value is "6", and does not appear when the set value is "1" (appears with a probability of 0%). That is,
A character like a tiger wearing sunglasses is a character that can uniquely determine that the set value is "6" (a character with 100% reliability of the suggested content). By providing such a definite character, the game machine 10 can give a sharpness to the suggestion of the set value.

The above is an example of suggesting a set value using a character by the game machine 10 in the modified example 2 of the second embodiment. The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting a set value using a character alone, but may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the third modification of the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is performed in the hold display area 505a.

Regarding the suggestion of the set value by the game machine 10 in the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, FIGS. 38 and 3
This will be described with reference to 9. FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the third modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the third modification of the second embodiment.

The display screen 523 of FIG. 38 (1) is a display screen after the announcement of the execution of the suggestion of the set value (after the display screen 513), and shows the display screen in the state where the suggestion effect is started to be executed.
The display screen 523 includes a suggestion effect display 524 in the display content. The suggestion effect display 524 displays a suggestion effect that suggests a set value. The suggestion effect display 524 is displayed in the hold display area 505a.

On the display screen 523, the suggestion effect display 524 displays a gacha (lottery machine), and a gacha game (
It is shown that the set value is suggested by the lottery ball discharged from the gacha). On the display screen 523, the suggestion effect display 524 indicates a state in which the lottery ball is discharged from the lottery machine.

The display screen 525 of FIG. 38 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 523, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. On the display screen 525, the lottery ball discharged from the gacha is displayed as "2" on the suggestion effect display 524. That is, the display screen 525 is the suggestion effect display 524.
Suggests "2" as the set value of the game machine 10.

The display screen 526 of FIG. 38 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 525, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. On the display screen 526, the suggestion effect display 524 indicates a state in which a new lottery ball is ejected from the lottery machine.

The display screen 527 of FIG. 39 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 526, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. On the display screen 527, the suggestion effect display 524 displays "3" as the lottery ball newly discharged from the gacha. That is, the display screen 527 suggests "2" and "3" as the set values of the game machine 10 in the suggestion effect display 524.

The display screen 528 of FIG. 39 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 527, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. On the display screen 528, the suggestion effect display 524 indicates a state in which a new lottery ball is ejected from the lottery machine.

The display screen 529 of FIG. 39 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 528, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. On the display screen 529, the suggestion effect display 524 displays "5" as the lottery ball newly discharged from the gacha. That is, the display screen 529 suggests "2", "3", and "5" as the set values of the game machine 10 in the suggestion effect display 524.

The above is an example of suggesting a set value in the hold display area 505a by the game machine 10 in the modification 3 of the second embodiment. In this way, the game machine 10 suggests the set value in the hold display area 505a, and thereby suggests the set value without interfering with the effect of the special figure variation display game (without changing the screen layout). be able to.

The game machine 10 may suggest a set value in the hold digestion display area 506a instead of or in addition to the hold display area 505a.
The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting the set value in the hold display area 505a alone, but may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10
The setting value suggested by each suggestion effect may be different.

[Modification 4 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the modified example 4 of the second embodiment will be described. In the modified example 4 of the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is performed by using the background display during the execution of the special figure variation display game.

The suggestion of the set value by the game machine 10 in the modified example 4 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the fourth modification of the second embodiment.

The display screen 530 of FIG. 40 (1) shows a display screen (display screen corresponding to the display screen 513) in a state in which the suggestion of the set value is executed (notice). The display screen 530 includes a plurality of display elements 531a and display elements 531b in the display contents. The display element 531a and the display element 531b are in charge of the background in the special figure variation display game. The display element 531a is a star-like character. The display element 531b is a rocket-like character.

On the display screen 530, the display element 531a is displayed on the entire screen, and each display element 531a moves appropriately in the screen to produce a shooting star flowing so that the special figure variation display game does not become monotonous. Give a change to.

For example, in the game machine 10, in an effect in which a shooting star is flowing, a display element 531a appears in a portion corresponding to the upper part of the screen, and the display element 531a is moved from a portion corresponding to the upper part to a part corresponding to the lower part. Disappear after moving. The game machine 10 may display the display element 531a not only on the back side of the large symbol group 501 but also on both the front side and the back side of the large symbol group 501.

On the display screen 530, the display element 531b changes the first display effect so as not to be monotonous by moving around the screen, for example.
The display screen 532 of FIG. 40 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 530, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. The display screen 532 includes the display element 531c in the display content. The display element 531c displays the suggested set value. On the display screen 532, the display element 531c is
It is a blank display (blank display), indicating that there is no suggested setting value. On the display screen 532, the display element 531a displays "2", suggesting "2" as the set value of the game machine 10.

The display screen 533 of FIG. 40 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 532, and shows a display screen suggesting a set value. On the display screen 533, the display element 531c displays "2", indicating that "2" has already been suggested as the setting value of the game machine 10. On the display screen 533, the display element 531a displays "4", suggesting "4" as the set value of the game machine 10.

That is, the display screen 533 suggests "2" and "4" as the set values of the game machine 10.
The above is an example of suggesting a set value using the background display by the game machine 10 in the modified example 4 of the second embodiment. In this way, the game machine 10 can suggest the set value without interfering with the effect of the special figure variation display game by suggesting the set value using the background display.

The gaming machine 10 may move only the display element 531a for displaying the set value on the front side of the large symbol group 501. According to this, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the suggested content by the player.

The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting a set value by using the background display independently.
It may be performed in combination with other suggestive effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

[Modification 5 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the modified example 5 of the second embodiment will be described. In the modified example 5 of the second embodiment, the push button (option setting unit) 25 performs the suggestion effect.

The suggestion of the set value by the game machine 10 in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a push button in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment.

FIG. 41 (1) shows an example of arrangement of the push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button.
The push button 25 includes a push button LED, a touch sensor, and a push button S.
Including W. The push button LED is a 9-system full-color LED. The touch sensor can detect the player's touch operation at eight locations. The push button SW is the push button 2
The pressing operation of 5 can be detected.

The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs the control signal of the push button LED to the push button 25, and inputs the detection signal of the touch sensor and the detection signal of the push button SW from the push button 25.

The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface that becomes the upper surface when the player looks down is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circles 250 on the upper surface thereof, which are about the size of a fingertip.
~ 258, a small circle 250 is placed in the center of the upper surface, and 8 is on the circumference surrounding the small circle 250.
Two small circles 251 to 258 are arranged.

The small circle portion 250 arranges one system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (TSW4) within its circumference. The small circle portion 251 is located to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (TSW1) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 252 is located diagonally upward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and has one push button LED and one.
Two touch sensors (TSW2) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 253 is the small circle part 25.
Located above 0, one pushbutton LED and one touch sensor (TSW3)
And are placed within that circumference. The small circle portion 254 is located diagonally upward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and 1
A system push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW5) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (TSW6) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 256 is the small circle part 2
Located diagonally downward to the right of 50, one push button LED and one touch sensor (T)
SW7) and are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 257 is located in the downward direction of the small circle portion 250.
One system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (TSW8) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 258 is located diagonally downward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs is arranged within the circumference thereof. Since the small circle portion 258 does not have a touch sensor,
It has a star-shaped polygonal design for easy distinction from the small circles 250 to 257 on which the touch sensor is placed. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not have a touch sensor, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors. The small circle portion 258 is located on the front left side of the small circle portions 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side when the push button 25 is in the center of the game machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side. , It makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle part 258 as a home position.

Although the push button 25 does not have the touch sensor arranged in the small circle portion 258, the touch sensor may be arranged in the same manner as in the small circle portions 250 to 257. Also, push button 25
May be provided with a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the player's touch operation instead of the touch sensor. In that case, the effect control device 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

FIG. 41 (2) shows an example of the mode in which the set values “2”, “3”, and “5” are suggested. FIG. 41
The push button 25 shown in (2) is set to the small circle portion (here, the small circle portion 252 located at the second position clockwise from the home position (small circle portion 258)) corresponding to the set value "2". value"
Small circle part corresponding to "3" (here, small circle part 253 located at the third position clockwise from the home position (small circle part 258)), small circle part corresponding to the set value "5" (here, small circle part) The predetermined effect is displayed at the small circle part 255) located at the fifth position clockwise from the home position (small circle part 258), and the set values of the game machine 10 are "2", "3", and "5". It is suggested that it is one of.

For example, the push button 25 is an aspect of suggesting a set value after notifying the execution of the suggestion (after the display screen 513) and then sequentially lighting each of the small circles 251 to 257 clockwise from the small circle 258. It becomes.

The above is an example of suggesting a set value using the push button 25 by the game machine 10 in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment. In this way, the game machine 10 can suggest the set value by using the push button 25 without disturbing the effect of the special figure variation display game on the display screen.

The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting the set value by using the push button 25 alone, but may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10
The setting value suggested by each suggestion effect may be different.

The suggestion of the set value using the push button 25 is an example of the suggestion of the set value other than the display screen, and is not limited to this. For example, the game machine 10 includes a start opening 1 (starting winning opening 36 which is the starting winning opening of special drawing 1 and a normal variable winning device 37) and a starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92 which is the starting winning opening of special drawing 2). The set value may be suggested by using the LED arranged around).

Further, the game machine 10 may suggest a set value by vibration using the operation unit 24 (handle) of the ball striking device. Further, the game machine 10 may suggest a set value by voice using a speaker that emits SE, BGM, or the like. Further, the game machine 10 may suggest a set value depending on the lighting mode by using a frame lamp provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like.

In this way, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of the effect by suggesting the set value by sound or vibration instead of suggesting the set value by the display screen. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the interest of the game.

Further, the game machine 10 may use a plurality of notification units (for example, a speaker and a push button) in combination to suggest a set value.
[Modification 6 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the modification 6 of the second embodiment will be described. In the sixth modification of the second embodiment, the set value is suggested according to the variation mode of the large symbol of the special figure variation display game.

Regarding the suggestion of the set value by the game machine 10 in the modified example 6 of the second embodiment, FIGS. 42 and 4
3,44 will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the display screen of the display device in the modified example 6 of the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the display screen of the display device in the modified example 6 of the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the display screen of the display device according to the modified example 6 of the second embodiment.

The game machine 10 starts a special figure variation display game (design variation). The display screen 534 of FIG. 42 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 500, and shows a display screen after starting the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 534, the large symbol group 501 (left symbol 501L, middle symbol 501C, and right symbol 501R) and the small symbol group 502 (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) have variable symbols, and the special symbol variation display game. Indicates that the variable display is in progress (the symbol is changing) (the variable display has started).

Further, on the display screen 534, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 reduces the hold number by "1" from the state of the display screen 500 and displays "2" with the start of the special figure change display game. ing. Further, on the display screen 534, the number of icons indicating the hold memory to be displayed on the hold display 505b is changed from the state of the display screen 500 to "with the start of the special figure variation display game."
It decreases by 1 ”indicating that the number of reserved memories is“ 2 ”. Further, on the display screen 534, the hold digestion display 506b displays an icon indicating the hold memory during digestion, indicating that the special figure change display game is in the change display.

Next, the game machine 10 starts an effect (suggestion effect) that suggests a set value. The display screen 535 of FIG. 42 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 534, and shows a display screen in a state in which the suggestion effect of the set value using the large symbol is started. The display screen 535 includes a suggestion effect display 536 in the display content. The suggestion effect display 536 displays a suggestion effect that suggests a set value using a large symbol.

On the display screen 535, the suggestion effect display 536 shows a treasure box displaying "1", a treasure box displaying "2", a treasure box displaying "3", and a treasure box displaying "4" as a suggestion effect suggesting a set value.
A treasure chest displaying "5" and a treasure chest displaying "6" (a treasure chest associated with the set values "1" to "6") are displayed. That is, on the display screen 535, the suggestion effect display 364 indicates that any value of "1" to "6" is suggested as the set value. In addition, the display screen 535
Then, each symbol (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501) constituting the large symbol group 501
C) rotates so that it turns inside out.

The display screen 537 of FIG. 42 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 535, and shows a display screen in which a suggestion effect of a set value using a large symbol is being executed. On the display screen 537, the large symbol group 501
Each of the symbols (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501C) constituting the above has finished rotating, and all the symbols are turned inside out.

The display screen 538 of FIG. 43 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 537, and shows a display screen in which a suggestion effect of a set value using a large symbol is being executed. On the display screen 538, the large symbol group 501
Each of the symbols (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501C) constituting the above is in a state of being turned upside down and gathered in one place to overlap to form a bundle.

The display screen 539 of FIG. 43 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 538, and shows a display screen in which a suggestion effect of a set value using a large symbol is being executed. On the display screen 539, the large symbol group 501
Each symbol (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501C) moves in a bundle toward the treasure box associated with the set value, and moves toward the treasure box (set value "1").
It is stored in a treasure chest that suggests. As a result, the game machine 10 suggests "1" as the set value of the game machine 10.

The display screen 540 of FIG. 43 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 539, and shows a display screen in which a suggestion effect of a set value using a large symbol is being executed. On the display screen 540, the suggestion effect display 5
36 fluctuates the treasure chest at high speed.

The display screen 541 of FIG. 44 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 540, and shows a display screen in which a suggestion effect of a set value using a large symbol is being executed. On the display screen 541, the suggestion effect display 5
36 finishes the high-speed fluctuation of the treasure box, and each symbol (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501C) constituting the large symbol group 501 is taken out from the treasure box in a bundle and heads toward the center of the screen. It is moving while expanding.

The display screen 542 of FIG. 44 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 541, and shows a display screen in which a suggestion effect of a set value using a large symbol is being executed. On the display screen 542, the large symbol group 501
Each of the symbols (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501C) constituting the above returns to the original position from the bundled state, and rotates so that the surface on which the symbol is displayed is displayed.

Next, the game machine 10 ends the effect of suggesting the set value (suggestion effect) and ends the variable display game. The display screen 543 of FIG. 44 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 542, and shows a display screen in a state in which the suggestion effect is finished and the special figure variation display game is finished. On the display screen 543, each of the symbols (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501C) constituting the large symbol group 501 has finished rotating, and all the symbols are stopped in a state of displaying numbers. Further, on the display screen 543, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are all stopped, indicating that the corresponding special symbol variation display game has ended. Further, on the display screen 543, the hold digestion display 506b is a blank display (a state in which the icon indicating the start memory during digestion is not displayed), indicating that the special figure variation display game has ended. ..

In the above effect, when suggesting a plurality of set values, the game machine 10 may suggest a plurality of set values by differentiating the treasure box for storing the symbol and the treasure box for discharging the symbol. Good. Alternatively, the game machine 10 associates a plurality of set values with one treasure box (for example, "1").
, Using a treasure chest that displays "2") may suggest multiple setting values. Alternatively, the game machine 10 may suggest a plurality of set values by storing the symbol in the treasure box (display screen 539) and discharging the symbol from the treasure box a plurality of times (display screen 541).

Next, a modified example of the suggestion effect of the modified example 6 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of the display screen of the display device in the modified example 6 of the second embodiment.

The display screen 544 shown in FIG. 45 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 537, and shows a display screen in which a suggestion effect of a set value using a large symbol is being executed. On the display screen 544, each symbol (left symbol 501L, right symbol 501R, middle symbol 501C) constituting the flipped large symbol group 501 is displayed.
Move toward the treasure chest associated with the set value while shrinking, and store in the treasure chest (the treasure chest suggesting the set value "1", the treasure chest suggesting "3", and the treasure chest suggesting "5"). Has been done. As a result, the game machine 10 suggests "1", "3", and "5" as the set values of the game machine 10. In this way, in the game machine 10, instead of the symbols being bundled and stored in the treasure box,
By storing each symbol in the treasure chest, it is possible to suggest multiple setting values.

The display screen 545 shown in FIG. 45 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 534, and shows a display screen in a state in which the suggestion effect of the set value using the large symbol is started.
On the display screen 545, the suggestion effect display 536 is used as a suggestion effect suggesting a set value.
Treasure chest displaying 1 ", treasure chest displaying one" 2 ", treasure chest displaying one" 3 ", treasure chest displaying one" 4 ", treasure chest displaying three" 5 ", one" Treasure chest displaying "6" (
The treasure chest associated with the set values "1" to "6") is displayed.

By making a plurality of treasure chests associated with some (here, "5") set values in this way, the game machine 10 suggests the set values ("5") associated with the plurality of treasure chests. It is possible to raise the expectation that will be given. Further, according to this, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of the production.

The display screen 546 shown in FIG. 45 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 534, and shows a display screen in a state in which the suggestion effect of the set value using the large symbol is started.
On the display screen 546, the suggestion effect display 536 shows a treasure box displaying "1", a treasure box displaying "2", a treasure box displaying "3", and a treasure box displaying "4" as a suggestion effect suggesting a set value.
In addition to the treasure chest that displays "5" and the treasure chest that displays "6" (the treasure chest associated with the set values "1" to "6"), the treasure chest that displays "treasure" (expectations for the special figure variation display game) A treasure chest that suggests the degree (for example, a treasure chest that suggests a big hit confirmation) is displayed.

In addition to the treasure box associated with the set value in this way, by providing the treasure box associated with the expectation level of the special figure variation display game, the game machine 10 suggests the set value and the expectation level of the special figure variation display game. Can also be suggested at the same time. According to this, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of the production.

The above is an example of suggesting a set value using the variation mode of the large symbol by the game machine 10 in the modified example 6 of the second embodiment. The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting the set value using the variation mode of the large symbol of the special figure variation display game, but may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

[Modification 7 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the modified example 7 of the second embodiment will be described. In the modified example 7 of the second embodiment, the set value is suggested according to the variation mode of the small symbol of the special figure variation display game.

The suggestion of the set value by the game machine 10 in the modified example 7 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the modified example 7 of the second embodiment.

The game machine 10 starts a special figure variation display game (design variation). The display screen 547 of FIG. 46 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 500, and shows a display screen after starting the special figure variation display game.

On the display screen 547, the number of icons (holding start memory) indicating the hold to be displayed on the hold display 505b is reduced by "1" from the state of the display screen 500 as the special figure variation display game is newly started. , Indicates that the number of reserved memories is "2". Further, on the display screen 547, the hold digestion display 506b displays an icon corresponding to the hold during digestion, indicating that the special figure change display game is in the change display. On the display screen 547, each symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 is displayed as "7", "6", "7" (see display screen 500), and then "1", "3".
, "5" is displayed. As a result, the game machine 10 suggests "1", "3", and "5" as the set values of the game machine 10. By suggesting the set value at the start using the small symbol in this way, the game machine 10 can suggest the set value without distracting the player's attention from the effect executed in the special figure variation display game.

The display screen 548 of FIG. 46 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 547, and shows a display screen after starting the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 548, the large symbol group 501 (left symbol 50)
The symbols 1L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R) and the small symbol group 502 (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) are fluctuating, and the special symbol variation display game is in the variable display (symbol variation). Indicates that (variation display has started).

The above is an example of suggesting a set value using the variation mode of the small symbol by the game machine 10 in the modified example 7 of the second embodiment. The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the suggestion of the set value using the variation mode of the small symbol is not limited to the time when the variation starts, but may be performed at the end of the variation.
Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting the set value using the variation mode of the small symbol of the special figure variation display game, but may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

[Modification 8 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the modified example 8 of the second embodiment will be described. In the modified example 8 of the second embodiment, the set value is suggested by using the mode of the effective line (the line capable of forming the reach) constituting the large symbol group of the special figure variation display game.

First, a configuration example of the effective reach in the modified example 8 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an effective line in the modified example 8 of the second embodiment.

The large symbol group 501 shown in FIG. 47 (1) shows the symbol arrangement when the effective line is 1.
The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol 501L, a medium symbol 501C, and a right symbol 501R. In the large symbol group 501, the combination of the left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R is an effective line.

The large symbol group 5011 shown in FIG. 47 (2) shows the symbol arrangement when the effective line is 2. The large symbol group 5011 includes the left symbol 501L1, 501L2, the medium symbol 501C, and the right symbol 5.
Includes 01R1, 501R2. In the large symbol group 5011, the left symbol 501L1 and the medium symbol 5
The combination of 01C and the right symbol 501R2, the combination of the left symbol 501L2, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R1 are effective lines, respectively.

The large symbol group 5012 shown in FIG. 47 (3) shows the symbol arrangement when the effective line is 3. The large symbol group 5012 includes the left symbol 501L1, 501L2, 501L3 and the medium symbol 501C.
And the right symbol 501R1, 501R2, 501R3. In the large symbol group 501, the combination of the left symbol 501L1, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R1 and the left symbol 501
A combination of L2, a middle symbol 501C, a right symbol 501R2, and a left symbol 501L3.
The combination of the middle symbol 501C and the right symbol 501R3 is an effective line, respectively.

The large symbol group 5013 shown in FIG. 47 (4) shows the symbol arrangement when the effective line is 4. The large symbol group 5013 includes a left symbol 501L1, 501L2, 501L3, 501L4, a medium symbol 501C, and a right symbol 501R1, 501R2, 501R3, 501R4. In the large symbol group 5013, the combination of the left symbol 501L1, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R1, the combination of the left symbol 501L2, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R2, the left symbol 501L3, and the middle symbol 501C , The combination of the right symbol 501R3, the left symbol 501L4, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R4 are effective lines, respectively.

The large symbol group 5014 shown in FIG. 47 (5) shows the symbol arrangement when the effective line is 5. The large symbol group 5014 has the left symbol 501L1, 501L2, 501L3, 501L4, 50.
1L5, middle symbol 501C, right symbol 501R1, 501R2, 501R3, 501R4
, 501R5 and the like. In the large symbol group 5014, the combination of the left symbol 501L1, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R1, the combination of the left symbol 501L2, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R2, the left symbol 501L3, and the middle symbol 501C And the right pattern 501R
The combination with 3 and the combination of the left symbol 501L4, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R4, and the combination of the left symbol 501L5, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R5 are effective lines, respectively.

The large symbol group 5015 shown in FIG. 47 (6) shows the symbol arrangement when the effective line is 6. The large symbol group 5015 is the left symbol 501L1, 501L2, 501L3, 501L4, 50.
1L5, 501L6, middle symbol 501C, right symbol 501R1, 501R2, 501R3
, 501R4, 501R5, 501R6 and the like. In the large symbol group 5015, the left symbol 501
A combination of L1, a middle symbol 501C, a right symbol 501R1, and a left symbol 501L2,
A combination of the middle symbol 501C and the right symbol 501R2, the left symbol 501L3, and the middle symbol 5
A combination of 01C and a right symbol 501R3, a combination of a left symbol 501L4, a middle symbol 501C, and a right symbol 501R4, a combination of a left symbol 501L5, a middle symbol 501C, and a right symbol 501R5, and a left symbol 501L6. , Middle symbol 501C and right symbol 501R
Each combination with 6 becomes an effective line.

The configuration example of the effective line is an example and is not limited to this. The game machine 10 can have different forms of effective lines (for example, two effective lines are arranged for each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol to form two effective lines), and the number of effective lines can be set. You can do more.

Next, the suggestion of the set value using the number of effective lines will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 shows
It is a timing chart which shows the flow of suggestion of the set value in the modification 8 of the 2nd Embodiment.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 48 (1), the set values of the game machine 10 are "2", "3", and "5" with the number of effective lines changed after the suggestion execution notice as the set value (number of effective lines = set value). The timing chart when suggesting that it is one of the above is shown.

The game machine 10 starts the Nth variation display game by the large symbol group 501 having an effective line of 1. Then, the game machine 10 gives a suggestion execution notice immediately before the timing t11 of the Nth variation display game. Then, the game machine 10 changes from the timing t11 to the large symbol group 501 to the large symbol group 5011. By setting the number of effective lines to "2" in this way, the game machine 10 suggests "2" as the set value of the game machine 10.

After that, the game machine 10 changes from the timing t12 to the large symbol group 5011 to the large symbol group 5012. By setting the number of effective lines to "3" in this way, the game machine 10 becomes the game machine 10.
"3" is suggested as the setting value of.

After that, the game machine 10 changes from the timing t13 to the large symbol group 5012 to the large symbol group 5014. By setting the number of effective lines to "5" in this way, the game machine 10 becomes the game machine 10.
"5" is suggested as the set value of. In this way, the game machine 10 suggests that the set value is any of "2", "3", and "5" by using the number of effective lines.

The gaming machine 10 may suggest a set value using the number of effective lines, and is not limited to one-to-one correspondence between the number of effective lines and the set value (the number of effective lines = the set value).
For example, the game machine 10 has a low setting (for example, the set value is "1") when there are few effective lines.
, "2", "3"), and when there are many effective lines, it suggests that the setting is high (for example, the set values are "4", "5", "6"). May be good.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 48 (2), the set value of the game machine 10 is "2" with the change amount of the effective line number changed after the suggestion execution notice as the set value (change amount of the effective line number = set value). The timing chart when it suggests that is shown.

The game machine 10 starts the Nth variation display game by the large symbol group 501 having an effective line of 1. Then, the game machine 10 gives a suggestion execution notice immediately before the timing t11 of the Nth variation display game. Then, the game machine 10 changes from the timing t11 to the large symbol group 501 to the large symbol group 5012. After that, the game machine 10 starts from the timing t12 to the large symbol group 50.
Change from 12 to large symbol group 5014. In this way, the game machine 10 sets the number of effective lines to "
It is suggested that the set value is "2" by increasing by +2 such as "1", "3", and "5".

In the game machine 10, the set value may be suggested using the increase amount of the effective line, and the increase amount of the effective line and the set value are associated one-to-one (the increase amount of the effective line = the set value). Not limited to. For example, the game machine 10 suggests that the setting value is low (for example, the set values are “1”, “2”, “3”) when the increase amount of the effective line is 1, and the increase amount of the effective line is set. When is 2, it may be suggested that the setting is high (for example, the set values are “4”, “5”, “6”).

Even if the accuracy (suggested reliability) of the set value suggested by the variation mode (reach number) of the symbol after suggesting the set value of the game machine 10 by using the number of effective lines and the increase amount of the effective line is suggested. Good.

For example, the gaming machine 10 may suggest that the accuracy is low when the number of reach is small, and suggests that the accuracy is high when the number of reach is large. In this case, the game machine 10
When the actual set value is suggested, the probability may be set so that the number of reach tends to increase, and when the actual set value is not suggested, the probability may be set so that the number of reach tends to decrease.

The gaming machine 10 may suggest the accuracy of the suggested set value depending on the mode of reach.
Here, the mode of reach will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the modified example 8 of the second embodiment.

The display screen 549 shown in FIG. 49 (1) is a diagram showing an example in the case where the number of effective lines is 3 and the number of reach is 3 (triple reach). On the display screen 549, the left symbol 501L1 and the right symbol 501R1 are temporarily stopped at "5", and the left symbol 501L1 and the right symbol 501 are temporarily stopped.
The R1 and the middle symbol 501C form a reach with a reach symbol of "5". Display screen 5
At 49, the left symbol 501L2 and the right symbol 501R2 temporarily stop at "7", and the left symbol 501L
2 and the right symbol 501R2 and the middle symbol 501C form a reach with a reach symbol of "7". On the display screen 549, the left symbol 501L3 and the right symbol 501R3 are temporarily stopped at "3", and the left symbol 501L3, the right symbol 501R3, and the middle symbol 501C form a reach whose reach symbol is "3". In this way, the display screen 549 has a mode in which three reach are formed by three kinds of symbols. As a result, the game machine 10 suggests the first probability as the probability that the set value is "3".

The display screen 550 shown in FIG. 49 (2) is a diagram showing an example in the case where the number of effective lines is 3 and the number of reach is 3 (triple reach). On the display screen 550, the left symbol 501L1 and the right symbol 501R1 are temporarily stopped at "7", and the left symbol 501L1 and the right symbol 501 are temporarily stopped.
The R1 and the middle symbol 501C form a reach with a reach symbol of "7". Display screen 5
At 50, the left symbol 501L2 and the right symbol 501R2 temporarily stop at "7", and the left symbol 501L
2 and the right symbol 501R2 and the middle symbol 501C form a reach with a reach symbol of "7". On the display screen 550, the left symbol 501L3 and the right symbol 501R3 are temporarily stopped at "7", and the left symbol 501L3, the right symbol 501R3, and the middle symbol 501C form a reach whose reach symbol is "7". In this way, the display screen 550 is in a mode in which three reach are formed by one kind of symbol. As a result, the game machine 10 suggests a second probability (> first probability) as a probability (for example, 100% probability) that the set value is "3".

In this way, the game machine 10 can also suggest the accuracy of reach by the number of types of symbols forming the reach.
The above is an example of suggesting a set value using the mode of the effective line by the game machine 10 in the modified example 8 of the second embodiment. The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting a set value using the mode of the effective line of the special figure variation display game, but may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

In addition, the game machine 10 may suggest a suggestion candidate of a set value by the number of effective lines, and suggest a set value by the mode of the subsequent symbol. For example, the game machine 10 suggests that the suggestion candidate of the set value is "6" or less ("1" to "6") by setting the number of effective lines to "6", and then has three reach. By forming it, it is suggested that the set value is "3".

Further, the game machine 10 may suggest a number that suggests a set value by the number of effective lines, and may suggest a set value by the mode of the subsequent symbol. For example, the game machine 10 suggests that setting the number of effective lines to "5" suggests a set value of 5 or less, and then sets "1", "2", and "3" as reach symbols. It is suggested that the set values are "1", "2", and "3" by forming the reach.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a display means (for example, a display device 41) and a setting means (for example, a display device 41).
Game control device 100, effect control device 300) and control means (for example, game control device 10)
0, production control device 300). The display means can display the game. The setting means can set one of two or more different game performances. The control means executes a predetermined game effect in the game in the first period until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs the game performance set in parallel with the game effect in the second period after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Perform a suggestion effect.

(2) The game machine 10 has a display means (for example, a display device 41) and a setting means (for example, a display device 41).
Game control device 100, effect control device 300) and control means (for example, game control device 10)
0, the effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner. The setting means can set one of two or more different game performances. The control means variablely displays the identification information in the variable display game, and executes a suggestion effect suggesting the set game performance in response to the stop display of the predetermined setting suggestion symbol.

(3) The stop display of (2) includes a main stop of the setting suggestion symbol and a temporary stop.
(4) The control means of (2) executes a suggestion effect during the temporary stop of the setting suggestion symbol (FIG. 36).
..

(5) The control means of (2) stops and displays the setting suggestion symbol, then resumes the variable display of the identification information, and executes the suggestion effect until the restarted variable display of the identification information is finally stopped. FIG. 31
).

(6) The control means of (2) performs a suggestion effect during the next and subsequent variable display games.
(7) The control means of (2) performs a suggestion effect that is executed independently of the variable display game, triggered by the stop display of the setting suggestion symbol (FIG. 34 (2)).

(8) The control means of (2) performs a suggestion effect independent of the variable display game in parallel with the variable display game (FIG. 30).
(9) The control means of (2) performs a variable effect of the variable display game including a suggestive effect (
42, 43, 44).

(10) The game machine 10 of (2) further includes an operation means (push button 25) capable of accepting the operation of the player, and the control means uses the operation means to perform a suggestion effect (FIG. 41).
(11) The game machine 10 of (2) further includes a background display means for displaying the background of the variable display game, and the control means performs a suggestion effect by using the background display by the background display means (FIG. 40).
).

(12) The game machine 10 includes display means (for example, display device 41), hold display means (for example, hold display 505b, hold digestion display 506b), and setting means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300). ) And control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display the game. Hold display means
It is possible to store the start memory as the execution right of the game and display the hold display according to the start memory. The setting means can set one of two or more different game performances. The control means executes a suggestion effect that suggests the set game performance by changing the display mode of the hold display (FIG. 35).

(13) The control means of (12) can execute the hold notice effect by changing the display mode of the hold display in relation to the result of the game corresponding to the start memory.
(14) The control means of (13) causes the suggestion effect to also serve as a hold notice effect.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment
Alerts about players and notification of company names (display of manufacturing company identification display that guides manufacturing companies,
The set value set in the game machine 10 is suggested when the sales company identification display) that guides the sales company is displayed. As a warning about the player, there are a card forgetting prevention display and a immersive prevention display.

First, FIGS. 50 and 51 show a configuration example of a display screen in the display device 41 of the third embodiment.
, 52 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a configuration example of a display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a configuration example of a display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a configuration example of a display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment.

The display screen 551 shown in FIG. 50 (1) is a display screen that calls attention to prevent forgetting to remove the card. The display screen 551 is a display screen (default screen) in a mode (basic mode) that does not suggest a set value. The display screen 551 includes a display element 552 and a display element 553 in the display content. The display element 552 displays a warning character "Caution for forgetting to remove the card!". The display element 553 displays an image showing how the card is ejected from the ejection port.

The display screen 554 shown in FIG. 50 (2) is a display screen (No. 1) that calls attention to the prevention of forgetting to remove the card in the mode (suggestion mode) in which the set value is suggested. On the display screen 554, the display element 553 displayed on the default screen has changed to the display element 553a. Specifically, in the display element 553a, the aspect of the surface of the card is different from the aspect of the display element 553 (the character "tiger card" and a character like a tiger wearing sunglasses are added). The display screen 554 suggests a set value according to the changed mode (suggests a set value corresponding to the changed mode).

As described above, the game machine 10 can raise the interest of the player by suggesting the set value in the display mode of the warning to prevent forgetting to take the card, and can improve the notification effect of the warning to prevent forgetting to take the card.

The display screen 555 shown in FIG. 50 (3) is a display screen (No. 2) that calls attention to the prevention of forgetting to remove the card in the mode (suggestion mode) in which the set value is suggested. In the display screen 555, in addition to the default screen, the display element 556 is further included in the display content. The display element 556 is a tiger-like character. Then, the display screen 555 suggests a setting value corresponding to the newly added display element 556.

As described above, the game machine 10 can raise the interest of the player by suggesting the set value in the display mode of the warning to prevent forgetting to take the card, and can improve the notification effect of the warning to prevent forgetting to take the card.

The display screen 557 shown in FIG. 50 (4) is a display screen (No. 3) that calls attention to the prevention of forgetting to remove the card in the mode (suggestion mode) in which the set value is suggested. On the display screen 557, the display element 552 displayed on the default screen has changed to the display element 552a. Specifically, in the display element 552a, the character mode is different from the mode of the display element 552, and the display screen 557 suggests a setting value corresponding to the changed mode.

As described above, the game machine 10 can raise the interest of the player by suggesting the set value in the display mode of the warning to prevent forgetting to take the card, and can improve the notification effect of the warning to prevent forgetting to take the card.

The display screen 558 shown in FIG. 51 (1) is a display screen (company name identification image display screen) for notifying the name of the company. The display screen 558 is a display screen (default screen) in which the set value is not suggested. The display screen 558 includes a display element 559 in the display content. The display element 559 displays a company name "Tiger Tiger Tiger Co., Ltd." and a tiger-like character (for example, a company mascot character).

The display screen 560 shown in FIG. 51 (2) is a display screen for notifying the name of the company in the mode (suggestion mode) that suggests the set value (here, "3"). The display screen 560 is the display screen 5
The display contents include three display windows 561 for displaying the equivalent of 58. The display window 561
Move appropriately in the display screen. In this way, the display screen 560 has a plurality of display screens 55 in the screen.
The mode includes 8 (display window 561), and suggests a set value corresponding to the mode (number).

In this way, the game machine 10 can raise the interest of the player by suggesting the set value according to the display mode of the alert of the company name, and can improve the notification effect of the alert of the company name.
The gaming machine 10 may suggest a set value by the locus of the display window 561 that moves the display screen 560 instead of the number.

The display screen 562 shown in FIG. 52 (1) is a display screen that calls attention to the prevention of entanglement. The display screen 562 is a display screen (default screen) in which the set value is not suggested. The display screen 562 includes a display element 563 in the display content. The display element 563 displays a warning character "Let's be careful about getting into it" and a character like a tiger.

The display screen 564 shown in FIG. 52 (2) is a display screen that calls attention to the prevention of entanglement in the mode (suggested mode) that suggests the set value (here, “2”). The display screen 564 includes two display windows 565 that perform a display corresponding to the display screen 562 in the display content. Display window 5
65 moves appropriately in the display screen. As described above, the display screen 564 includes a plurality of display screens 562 (display windows 565) in the screen, and suggests a setting value corresponding to the mode (number).

As described above, the game machine 10 can raise the interest of the player by suggesting the set value in the display mode of the alert to prevent the entanglement, and can improve the notification effect of the alert to prevent the entanglement.

The game machine 10 may suggest a set value by the locus of the display window 565 that moves the display screen 564 instead of the number.
Next, the flow of suggesting the set value by the notification display of the alert will be described with reference to FIG. 53.
FIG. 53 is a timing chart (No. 1) showing a flow of suggestion of set values in the third embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 53 (1) is a timing chart showing a flow when the set value is not suggested. The game machine 10 starts the warning display of the warning in the basic mode (default mode) from the timing t1, and ends the warning display of the warning at the timing t4.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 53 (2) is a timing chart showing a flow when suggesting a set value throughout the period of notification display from the start time to the end time. The game machine 10 starts the alert display of the alert in the suggestion mode from the timing t1, and ends the alert display of the alert at the timing t4.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 53 (3) is a display screen timing chart showing a flow when suggesting a set value from the middle. The game machine 10 starts the notification display of the alert in the basic mode from the timing t1. The game machine 10 gives a suggestion execution notice immediately before the timing t2, changes the mode from the basic mode to the suggestion mode from the timing t2, and ends the warning display of the alert at the timing t4. The suggestion execution notice (suggestion execution notification) is a notice that the suggestion of the set value starts, and is executed by using, for example, light, sound, or a display screen.

In this way, the game machine 10 is noticed by giving a suggestion execution notice immediately before the suggestion mode is replaced, not after the basic mode is replaced with the suggestion mode, thereby preventing the suggestion of the set value from being overlooked. It is possible for the player to grasp the changed part between the basic mode and the suggested mode. The suggestion execution notice (suggestion execution notification) may be given not only at the start of the suggestion of the set value but also at the end.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 53 (4) is a display screen timing chart showing a flow when suggesting a set value from the start to the middle. The game machine 10 has a timing t1
The notification display of the alert is started in the suggestion mode. The game machine 10 gives a notice of the end of suggestion execution immediately before the timing t2, replaces the mode from the suggestion mode to the basic mode from the timing t2, and ends the warning display of the alert at the timing t4. In addition, suggestion execution end notice (suggestion execution notification)
Is a notice that the suggestion of the set value is finished, and is executed by using, for example, light, sound, or a display screen.

In this way, the game machine 10 is not after the suggestion mode is replaced with the basic mode, but immediately before the basic mode is replaced, and the suggestion execution notice is given to attract attention, thereby preventing the suggestion of the set value from being overlooked. It is possible for the player to grasp the changed part between the suggested mode and the basic mode. The suggestion execution notice (suggestion execution notification) may be given not only at the end of the suggestion of the set value but also at the start.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 53 (5) is a display screen timing chart showing a flow when suggesting a set value a plurality of times. The game machine 10 starts the notification display of the alert in the basic mode from the timing t1. The game machine 10 replaces the mode from the basic mode to the suggested mode (a mode suggesting that the set value is "2") from the timing t2, and suggests that the suggested mode (the set value is "2") at the timing t3. (Aspect to be used) is replaced with a suggestion mode (a mode suggesting that the set value is "5"), and the notification display of the alert is terminated.

In this way, the game machine 10 suggests that the set value is either "2" or "5". According to this, the game machine 10 can suggest a plurality of set values by changing the suggestion mode a plurality of times. In this case as well, the game machine 10 may give a suggestion execution notice.

The game machine 10 has been described as suggesting a set value by exchanging a basic mode and a suggestion mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game machine 10 is a layer displaying a basic mode (
A layer (setting suggestion layer) that displays the difference between the notification display layer) and the basic mode is prepared, and by turning on the setting suggestion layer, the difference is displayed by overlapping with the basic mode to realize the suggestion mode, and the set value You may try to make a suggestion.

Here, the flow when suggesting the set value by turning the setting suggestion layer ON / OFF will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a timing chart (No. 2) showing a flow of suggestion of set values in the third embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 54 is a display screen timing chart showing a flow when suggesting a set value from the middle, and is a timing chart corresponding to FIG. 53 (3).

The game machine 10 turns on the notification display layer at the timing t1 and starts the notification display of the alert according to the basic mode. The game machine 10 gives a suggestion execution notice immediately before the timing t2, and by turning on the setting suggestion layer from the timing t2, the notification display by the suggestion mode is started by overlapping the difference with the basic mode, and the notification display layer is set at the timing t4. And the setting suggestion layer is turned off to end the warning display of the alert.

In this way, a setting suggestion layer that displays the difference from the basic mode is prepared, and the setting suggestion layer is set to O.
By realizing the suggestion mode in combination with the basic mode by N, the game machine 10 can reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance as compared with the case where the basic mode and the suggestion mode are replaced.

The above is an example of suggestion of the set value using the notification display of the alert by the game machine 10 in the third embodiment. The game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (it is sufficient if the set value set in the game machine 10 can be estimated through a plurality of suggestion effects). , The suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting the set value by using the notification display of the special figure variation display game, and may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. The game machine 10 of the first modification of the third embodiment suggests the set value set in the game machine 10 by the notification display of the alerting that is continuously performed.

The flow of suggesting the set value by the notification display of the alert in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing a flow of suggestion of set values in the first modification of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55, the game machine 10 continuously performs a forget-taking prevention display, a company name notification display (company name identification display), and a immersive prevention display. The order of the forgotten removal prevention display, the company name notification display, and the immersive prevention display is an example and is not limited to this. Further, the display for preventing forgetting to take, the company name notification display, and the display for preventing immersiveness are not limited to be executed, and any two of them may be executed.

The game machine 10 displays the company name notification from the timing t11 to the timing t12, displays the company name from the timing t12 to the timing t13, and displays the entanglement prevention display from the timing t13 to the timing t14.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 55 (1) shows a timing chart when "2", "4", and "6" are suggested as set values. The game machine 10 does not suggest a set value during the card removal prevention display (timing t11 to timing t12), and the set values are "2" and "4" during the company name notification display (timing t12 to timing t13). , "6" is suggested, and the set value is not suggested during the immersive prevention display (timing t13 to timing t14). In this way, the game machine 10 suggests "2", "4", and "6" as set values in the notification display of a series of alerts.

In this way, the game machine 10 has "2" and "2" as set values in the notification display of a series of alerts.
When suggesting "4" or "6", the set value may be suggested only when the notification of any of the alerts is displayed. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may have different accuracy of suggestion depending on which of the alerts the set value is suggested at the time of displaying the notification. Further, the game machine 10 suggests a set value at the time of displaying a warning of a series of warnings, and the accuracy of the suggestion (for example,
It is more accurate when it is done by all than when it is done by either)
May be different. By suggesting the set value at the time of displaying the notification of any of the warnings in this way, the game machine 10 can make the player pay attention to the notification display of the series of warnings. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the notification effect of the notification display for alerting.

The timing shown in FIG. 55 (2) shows a timing chart when "2", "4", and "6" are suggested as set values. In the game machine 10, the set values are "1", "2", "3", "4", "6" while the card is forgotten prevention display (timing t11 to timing t12).
, And suggests that the set value is one of "1", "2", "4", and "6" during the company name notification display (timing t12 to timing t13). However, it is suggested that the set value is one of "2", "4", and "6" during the immersive prevention display (timing t13 to timing t14). In this way, the game machine 10 suggests "2", "4", and "6" as set values in the notification display of a series of alerts.

In this way, the game machine 10 has "2" and "2" as set values in the notification display of a series of alerts.
When suggesting "4" and "6", the set value is gradually reduced as the alert display of the alert progresses, and the last suggested content is also used as the suggested content of the set value in the alert display of the series of alerts. Good. By narrowing down the set values suggested step by step in this way, the game machine 10 can make the player pay attention to the notification display of a series of alerts. As a result, the game machine 10
Can improve the notification effect of the notification display of alerting.

The timing shown in FIG. 55 (3) shows a timing chart when "2", "4", and "6" are suggested as set values. The game machine 10 suggests that the set value is "2" during the card removal prevention display (timing t11 to timing t12), and the set value is "4" during the company name notification display (timing t12 to timing t13). It is suggested that the set value is "6" during the immersive prevention display (timing t13 to timing t14). In this way, the game machine 10 suggests "2", "4", and "6" as set values in the notification display of a series of alerts.

In this way, the game machine 10 has "2" and "2" as set values in the notification display of a series of alerts.
When suggesting "4" and "6", a combination of the contents suggested at the time of displaying the notification of each warning may be used as the suggestion content of the set value in the series of warning display of the warning. In this way, by combining the contents suggested at the time of displaying the notification of each warning as the suggestion content of the set value in the notification display of the series of warnings, the game machine 10 can notify the player of a series of warnings. The notification display can be noticed. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the notification effect of the notification display for alerting.

The above is an example of suggestion of a set value using the notification display of continuous alerting by the game machine 10 in the first modification of the third embodiment. In addition, the game machine 10 may set a relatively high probability of suggesting a set value set in the game machine 10 (the game machine 1 through a plurality of suggestion effects).
It suffices if the set value set to 0 can be inferred), and the suggested set value does not necessarily have to include the actual set value.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to suggesting a set value by using the continuous alert display of the special figure variation display game, but may be combined with other suggestion effects. In that case, the game machine 10 may have different set values suggested in each suggestion effect.

By the way, if a player wins a big victory as a result of the game, he / she may not forget the fun at that time and may gradually become absorbed in it. Therefore, the ratio of executing the suggestion of the set value in the alert display is the number of big hits, the number of difference balls (number of out balls-number of safe balls), and
It may be changed according to the ball output rate ((number of out balls ÷ number of safe balls) × 100). In particular, regarding the suggestion of the set value made during the immersive prevention display, the number of big hits is increased from the standard value (for example, 20 times), and the number of difference balls is increased from the standard value (for example, 10,000 balls) (number of difference balls). Is negative), the ball output rate is increased from the standard value (for example, 110%), or all of them are satisfied, and the appearance rate of the suggestion effect is increased (
For example, it may be increased by 10%). By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately alert the player who is the immersive reserve force, and it is possible to prevent him from becoming a enthusiastic player.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a display means (for example, a display device 41), a warning means (for example, a display device 41), and a setting means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300).
) And control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300).
The display means can display the game. The alerting means is to alert the game (card removal prevention display (FIG. 50), immersive prevention display (FIG. 52)). The setting means can set one of two or more different game performances. The control means alerts the alerting means including a suggestion effect suggesting the game performance set by the setting means.

(2) The game machine 10 includes a display means (for example, a display device 41), a warning means (for example, a display device 41), a company name display means (for example, a display device 41), and a setting means (for example, a game). The control device 100 and the effect control device 300) and control means (for example, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300) are provided. The display means can display the game.
As a means of calling attention, a warning regarding the game (a display for preventing forgetting to remove the card, a display for preventing immersiveness) is performed. The company name display means displays a company name identification display that guides the company name before or after the warning (FIG. 51). The setting means can set one of two or more different game performances. The control means causes the company name display means to display the company name identification display including the suggestion effect suggesting the game performance set by the setting means (FIG. 55).

(3) The control means of (2) displays a company name identification display between the first alert and the second alert by the alert means (FIG. 55).
[Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment can perform a suggestion effect suggesting a set value.
At this time, the game machine 10 groups a plurality of suggestion effects as a set suggestion effect group for each suggestion intensity. The game machine 10 executes a suggestion effect corresponding to the current setting suggestion effect group. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform the suggestion effect with different suggestion intensities for each setting suggestion effect group.

Further, the game machine 10 detects the game amount in the game machine 10 and switches the suggestion effect setting group according to the game amount. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform the suggestion effect with different suggestion strengths according to the amount of games played.

The suggestion strength is an index showing the strength of the suggestion, and corresponds to the reliability of the suggestion in one aspect and the clarity of the suggestion in one aspect. Further, the game amount is, in a broad sense, the operating amount of the game machine 10, and can be quantitatively measured by, for example, the number of outs. The number of outs is the number of game balls discharged from the game area, and corresponds to the number of game balls entering the game area.

First, the setting suggestion effect group lottery table used for switching the setting suggestion effect group will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect group lottery table according to the fourth embodiment.

First, FIG. 56 (1) shows a setting suggestion effect group lottery table (initial state). The setting suggestion effect group lottery table (initial state) is a table used when the game amount is initialized.

The setting suggestion effect group lottery table (initial state) defines the selection probabilities of three setting suggestion effect groups C, B, and A for every six set values. For example, the game machine 10 has a set value of "
When it is "1", the setting suggestion effect group C is selected with the probability P (C1), the setting suggestion effect group B is selected with the probability P (B1), and the setting suggestion effect group A is selected with the probability P (A1). .. It is assumed that the suggestion intensity of the setting suggestion effect group B is stronger than that of the setting suggestion effect group C, and the suggestion intensity of the setting suggestion effect group A is stronger than that of the setting suggestion effect group B. Also,
The probability of the probability P (B1) is smaller than the probability P (C1), and the probability P (A) is smaller than the probability P (B1).
It is assumed that the probability of 1) is small. The setting value "2" to the setting value "6" are the same as the setting value "1".

In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to select any one of the three setting suggestion effect groups C, B, and A for each set value in the initial state. Further, the game machine 10 is made easier to be selected as the setting suggestion effect group having a lower suggestion intensity in the initial state. In addition, game machine 1
0 may not necessarily make all three setting suggestion effect groups selectable in the initial state. For example, the game machine 10 may not be able to select the setting suggestion effect group A having the highest suggestion intensity in the initial state, or may be able to select only the setting suggestion effect group C having the lowest suggestion intensity in the initial state. .. Further, the game machine 10 may have different selection probabilities of the setting suggestion effect group for each set value. For example, the game machine 10 sets the selection probability P (A1) of the setting suggestion effect group A in the set value “1” and the selection probability P (A6) of the setting suggestion effect group A in the set value “6”. (A6)
> It can be different like the selection probability P (A1).

Next, FIG. 56 (2) shows a setting suggestion effect group lottery table (intermediate state). The setting suggestion effect group lottery table (intermediate state) is a table used every time the game amount reaches a predetermined amount.

The setting suggestion effect group lottery table (intermediate state) defines the selection probabilities of two setting suggestion effect groups B and A for every six set values. For example, the game machine 10 has a set value of "1".
When, the setting suggestion effect group B is selected with the probability P (B1'), and the setting suggestion effect group A is selected with the probability P (A1'). It is assumed that the probability of the probability P (A1') is smaller than the probability P (B1'). The setting value "1" is also set for the setting value "6" from the setting value "2".
Is similar to. The game machine 10 is trying to improve the expectation for the setting suggestion effect in the intermediate state rather than the initial state by excluding the setting suggestion effect group C from the options.

In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to select one of the two setting suggestion effect groups B and A at each set value in the intermediate state. Further, the game machine 10 is made easier to be selected as the setting suggestion effect group having a lower suggestion intensity in the intermediate state. The gaming machine 10 may not necessarily make all of the two setting suggestion effect groups selectable in the intermediate state. For example, the game machine 10 may not be able to select the setting suggestion effect group A having the highest suggestion intensity in the intermediate state, or may be able to select only the setting suggestion effect group B having the lowest suggestion intensity in the intermediate state. .. Further, the game machine 10 may have different selection probabilities of the setting suggestion effect group for each set value. For example, game machine 1
0 is the selection probability P (A1') of the setting suggestion effect group A in the set value "1" and the set value "1".
The selection probability P (A6') of the setting suggestion effect group A in "6" and the selection probability P (A6')
)> Selection probability P (A1') can be different.

The setting suggestion effect group lottery table (intermediate state) is a table used when the game amount reaches a predetermined amount, but when the current setting suggestion effect group is the setting suggestion effect groups A and B. It may be a table used for.

Next, FIG. 56 (3) shows a setting suggestion effect group lottery table (final state). The setting suggestion effect group lottery table (final state) is a table used when the game amount reaches the upper limit amount set as the upper limit in advance.

The setting suggestion effect group lottery table (final state) defines a selection probability "1" of one setting suggestion effect group A for every six set values. That is, the game machine 10 selects the setting suggestion effect group A when the game amount reaches the upper limit amount regardless of the set value. The gaming machine 10 guarantees the selection of the setting suggestion effect group A when the game amount reaches the upper limit amount, thereby improving the expectation for the setting suggestion effect in the final state rather than in the initial state or the intermediate state.

Although it is assumed that the game machine 10 has three setting suggestion effect groups C, B, and A, it may have two or four or more setting suggestion effect groups. In addition, game machine 1
Although 0 has a setting suggestion effect group lottery table (intermediate state), it may not have a setting suggestion effect group lottery table (intermediate state), or two or more setting suggestion effect group lottery tables (intermediate state). It may have an intermediate state).

Next, the suggestion intensity is an index showing the strength of the suggestion, and it is said that the reliability of the suggestion corresponds to the reliability of the suggestion in one aspect and the clarity of the suggestion corresponds to the clarity of the suggestion in one aspect. This will be described more specifically. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the suggested intensity of the fourth embodiment.

First, FIG. 57 (1) shows the suggestion reliability correspondence for each setting suggestion effect group. The suggestion reliability of the setting suggestion effect group C is "low". The suggestion reliability of the setting suggestion effect group B is
It is "medium". The suggestion reliability of the setting suggestion effect group A is “high”. That is, it shows that the suggestion reliability of the setting suggestion effect group C is the lowest among the three setting suggestion effect groups C, B, and A, and the suggestion reliability of the setting suggestion effect group A is the highest.

Next, the probability of confirmation / false alarm for each suggested reliability is shown in FIG. 57 (2). Suggested reliability "low" is
One-sixth of the notification content is a confirmation report, and five-sixth of the notification content is a false alarm. That is, when the suggestion reliability is "low", the ratio of the notification content including the confirmation report is low, and the ratio of the notification content including the false alarm is high. As for the suggested reliability "medium", 3/6 of the notification contents are false reports and 3/6 of the notification contents are false reports. That is, the suggested reliability "medium" is about the same as the ratio of the notification content including the confirmation report and the ratio of the notification content including the false alarm. As for the suggested reliability "high", 6/6 of the notified contents are false reports and 0/6 of the notified contents are false reports. That is, when the suggested reliability is "high", the ratio of the confirmed information included in the notification content is high.
The percentage of false alarms included in the notification content is low. Therefore, it is shown that the suggestion reliability of the setting suggestion effect group C is the lowest among the three setting suggestion effect groups C, B, and A, and the suggestion reliability of the setting suggestion effect group A is the highest.

Next, the number of suggestions for each suggestion reliability is shown in FIG. 57 (3). For the suggested reliability "low", the selection probability of the notification suggesting one to four set values is set to 1/6, and the selection probability of the notification suggesting five set values is set to 2/6. That is, when the suggested reliability is "low", the number of set values suggested by the notification is large as an expected value, and as a result, the degree of ambiguity as the notification content is large. For the suggested reliability "medium", the selection probability of the notification suggesting one to three set values is set to 1/6, the selection probability of the notification suggesting four set values is set to 3/4, and five settings are set. The selection probability of the notification suggesting the value is set to 0/6. That is, the suggested reliability "medium" means that the number of set values suggested by the notification is medium as the expected value. That is, the suggested reliability "medium" means that the number of set values suggested by the notification is neither large nor small as the expected value, and as a result, the degree of ambiguity as the notification content is medium. Suggestion reliability "high" reduces the selection probability of notification suggesting one set value to 1/6.
Let the selection probability of the notification suggesting the two set values be 2/6, and the selection probability of the notification suggesting the three set values be 3/6. That is, when the suggested reliability is "high", the number of set values suggested by the notification is small as the expected value, and as a result, the ambiguity as the notification content is small.

Note that the notification examples when the number of suggested setting values is "1" are "setting 6 confirmed" and "setting 6".
?? "And so on. Further, the notification example when the number of suggested setting values is "2" is "settings 5 and 6".
There are "confirmation", "setting 5, 6?", Etc. Further, examples of notification when the number of suggested setting values is "3" include "settings 4, 5, 6 confirmed", "even number setting?", And the like.

Further, the accuracy of the suggestion reliability may be suggested by the display color (background, characters, frame, etc.) of the notification message, the character, or the like. For example, the accuracy of the suggestion reliability indicated by the character color of the notification message may be increased in the order of blue characters, red characters, and gold characters.

Next, the probability information and the number of out balls that the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 will be described. The game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of the probability information and the number of out balls at the time of RAM initialization and power failure recovery. Here, the game control device 100 is the effect control device 3
The RAM initialization command and the power failure recovery command to be notified to 00 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a RAM initialization command and a power failure recovery command according to the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300 in step S54 (see FIG. 9) of the main process, and sends a command at the time of power failure recovery in step S59 (see FIG. 9) to the effect control device 300. Send to.

(1) The RAM initialization command indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the time of RAM initialization. First, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “model designation”) in the transmission order “1”. The command name "model designation" includes MODE "ACH" and any one of ACTION "10H" to ACTION "30H" depending on the model. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 1 pending number”) in the transmission order “2”.
The command name "Special Figure 1 Number of Holds" is MODE "A1H" and ACTIO corresponding to no hold.
Includes N "01H". Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 2 hold number”) in the transmission order “3”. The command name "Special Figure 2 Hold Number" is MODE "A2H"
And the corresponding ACTION "01H" without hold. Next, the game control device 100
The command (command name "probability information") of the transmission order "4" is transmitted. The command name "probability information" includes MODE "A0H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to the initial state.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “set value”) in the transmission order “5”. The command name "setting value" is MODE "AFH" and ACTIO corresponding to the setting value.
N "01H" to "06H" are included. The ACTION "01H" to "06H" correspond to the set values "1" to the set value "6".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (lower)”) in the transmission order “6”. The command name "out ball number (lower)" includes MODE "D3H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (lower). The game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (upper)”) in the transmission order “7”.
The command name "out ball number (upper)" includes MODE "D4H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (upper).

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “power on”) in the transmission order “8”. The command name "power on" is MODE "AAH" and the corresponding ACTION "
55H ”is included.

As a result, the game control device 100 has set values (1 to 6) set at the time of RAM initialization.
(Range) and the number of out balls (range from 0 to 65535) at the time of RAM initialization.
You can notify 00.

(2) The power failure recovery command indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 when the power failure is recovered. First, the game control device 100 has a command (command name "model designation") in the transmission order "1".
) Is sent. The command name "specify model" is MODE "ACH" and ACT depending on the model.
Includes any of ION "10H" to ACTION "30H". Next, the game control device 1
00 transmits a command in the transmission order "2" (command name "special figure 1 pending number"). The command name "Special Figure 1 Number of Holds" is MODE "A1H" and ACT corresponding to the number of holds 4 from no hold.
Includes any of ION "01H" to ACTION "05H". Next, the game control device 1
00 transmits a command in the transmission order "3" (command name "special figure 2 pending number"). The command name "Special Figure 2 Hold Number" is MODE "A2H" and ACT corresponding to Hold Number 4 from No Hold.
Includes any of ION "01H" to ACTION "05H". Next, the game control device 1
00 transmits a command (command name "probability information") in the transmission order "4". Command name "
"Probability information" is MODE "A0H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to various gaming states.
Includes any of ACTION "07H" from.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “set value”) in the transmission order “5”. The command name "setting value" is MODE "AFH" and ACTIO corresponding to the setting value.
N "01H" to "06H" are included. The ACTION "01H" to "06H" correspond to the set values "1" to the set value "6".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (lower)”) in the transmission order “6”. The command name "out ball number (lower)" includes MODE "D3H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (lower). The game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (upper)”) in the transmission order “7”.
The command name "out ball number (upper)" includes MODE "D4H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (upper).

Next, the game control device 100 uses the command of the transmission order "8-1" (command name "customer waiting demo") or the command of the transmission order "8-2" (command name "8-2") as the command of the transmission order "8".
Send one of the commands corresponding to "Power failure recovery"). The command name "Customer Waiting Demo" is
Includes MODE "80H" and the corresponding ACTION "55H". The command name "power outage recovery" includes MODE "ABH" and the corresponding ACTION "55H".

As a result, the game control device 100 sets the set value (range of 1 to 6) set at the time of power failure recovery and the number of out balls (range of 0 to 65535) at the time of RAM initialization.
Can be notified to.

The game control device 100 is a production control device 300 even when the probability information and the number of out balls are variablely displayed.
Notify to. Here, a variable time command notified by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the variable system command of the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special figure 1 game process (see FIG. 21) or the special figure 2 game process (see FIG. 22), and transmits the effect command to the effect control device 300.
The variable time command (variable system command) indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure game. First, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “decorative symbol designation”) in the transmission order “1”. The command name "decorative pattern designation" is MODE "8
Includes "5H" and any of ACTION "11H" to ACTION "7FH" depending on the decorative pattern. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “variation pattern designation”) in the transmission order “2”. The command name "variation pattern specification" is MODE "C0H".
To MODE "D2H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to each fluctuation pattern
”To include any of ACTION“ 7FH ”. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 1 pending number”) in the transmission order “3”. The command name "Special Figure 1 Hold Number" is MODE "A1H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold.
”To include any of ACTION“ 05H ”. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 2 hold number”) in the transmission order “4”. The command name "Special Figure 2 Hold Number" is MODE "A2H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold.
”To include any of ACTION“ 05H ”.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (lower)”) in the transmission order “5”. The command name "out ball number (lower)" includes MODE "D3H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (lower). The game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (upper)”) in the transmission order “6”.
The command name "out ball number (upper)" includes MODE "D4H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (upper).

As a result, the game control device 100 can notify the effect control device 300 of the number of out balls (range of 0 to 65535) at the start of the fluctuation in addition to the required information at the start of the fluctuation.
The game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of the probability information and the number of out balls even when the look-ahead variation is displayed. Here, the command at the time of the look-ahead fluctuation notified by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead variable command according to the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special figure 1 game process (see FIG. 21) or the special figure 2 game process (see FIG. 22), and transmits the effect command to the effect control device 300.
The look-ahead fluctuation command (look-ahead fluctuation system command) indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the start of the look-ahead fluctuation of the special figure game (special figure 1 game or special figure 2 game). First, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name "look-ahead decoration symbol designation") in the transmission order "1". The command name "pre-reading decoration symbol designation" includes MODE "FDH" and one of ACTION "11H" to ACTION "7FH" depending on the pre-reading decoration symbol. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “look-ahead variation pattern designation”) in the transmission order “2”. The command name "look-ahead fluctuation pattern specification" is MODE "EOH".
”To MODE“ F2H ”and ACTION corresponding to each look-ahead fluctuation pattern
Includes any of "01H" to ACTION "7FH". Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 1 pending number”) in the transmission order “3”. The command name "Special Figure 1 Number of Holds" is MODE "A1H" and ACTION corresponding to the number of holds 4 from no hold.
Includes any of "01H" to ACTION "05H". Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 2 hold number”) in the transmission order “4”. The command name "Special Figure 2 Hold Number" is MODE "A2H" and ACTION corresponding to Hold Number 4 from No Hold.
Includes any of "01H" to ACTION "05H".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (lower)”) in the transmission order “5”. The command name "out ball number (lower)" includes MODE "D3H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (lower). The game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “out number of balls (upper)”) in the transmission order “6”.
The command name "out ball number (upper)" includes MODE "D4H" and ACTION "00H" to "FFH" corresponding to the out ball number (upper).

As a result, the game control device 100 can notify the effect control device 300 of the number of out balls (range of 0 to 65535) when the look-ahead fluctuates, in addition to the required information when the look-ahead fluctuates.
The game control device 100 is not limited to this, and the number of out balls may be added and transmitted when the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 30
When 0, the number of out balls can be grasped at any time.

[Setting suggestion effect group determination process]
Next, regarding the setting suggestion effect group determination process for determining the setting suggestion effect group, FIG. 61.
Will be described with reference to. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the setting suggestion effect group determination process of the fourth embodiment. The setting suggestion effect group determination process is a process executed by the control unit of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect group determination process when a command including the number of out balls is acquired from the game control device 100.

[Step D91] The control unit acquires the number of out balls from a command including the number of out balls.
[Step D92] The control unit determines whether or not it is the timing to initialize the setting suggestion effect group (setting suggestion initialization). The setting suggestion initialization timing is a timing to be set in advance, and includes, for example, a RAM initialization timing, a setting change timing, each jackpot end, each end of normal power support after the jackpot, and each predetermined game amount detection.

The control unit proceeds to step D93 when it is the timing of setting suggestion initialization, and proceeds to step D96 when it is not the timing of setting suggestion initialization.
[Step D93] The control unit sets the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1. Suggestion production opportunity standard 1 is a standard for determining a setting suggestion production group lottery opportunity. For example, suggestion production opportunity standard 1
Is the increment "100" of the out sphere.

[Step D94] The control unit sets the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2. The suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 is a standard for determining an opportunity to switch to the setting suggestion effect group lottery table (final state).
For example, the suggestion effect opportunity criterion 2 is an out-ball increment of "20,000".

[Step D95] The control unit initializes the setting suggestion effect group. For example, the control unit sets the setting suggestion effect group C. In addition, the control unit initializes the setting suggestion effect group and sets the setting suggestion effect group lottery table (initial state) as the setting suggestion effect group lottery table. After initializing the setting suggestion effect group, the control unit ends the setting suggestion effect group determination process. The control unit uses the number of out balls notified from the game control device 100 as the number of out balls at the time of initialization, the number of out balls when the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 is reached, and the number of out balls when the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 is reached. Keep as a number. As a result, the control unit can grasp the increment of the out sphere.

[Step D96] The control unit determines whether or not the increment of the number of out balls reaches the suggestion effect opportunity criterion 1. The control unit is in step D97 if the increment of the number of out balls reaches the suggested production opportunity standard 1.
If the increment of the number of out balls does not reach the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1, the setting suggestion effect group determination process is terminated.

[Step D97] The control unit determines whether or not the increment of the number of out balls reaches the suggestion effect opportunity criterion 2. The control unit is in step D10 if the increment of the number of out balls reaches the suggested production opportunity standard 2.
If the increment of the number of out balls does not reach the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2, the process proceeds to step D98.

[Step D98] The control unit acquires the setting suggestion effect group lottery table being set.
[Step D99] The control unit draws the setting suggestion effect group according to the setting suggestion effect group lottery table being set.

[Step D100] The control unit updates the setting suggestion effect group to the setting suggestion effect group according to the lottery result, and ends the setting suggestion effect group determination process.
[Step D101] The control unit updates the setting suggestion effect group to the setting suggestion effect group A and ends the setting suggestion effect group determination process.

In this way, the control unit can provide an opportunity to update the setting suggestion effect group every time the number of out balls reaches the suggestion effect opportunity criterion 1, and can update the setting suggestion effect group according to the lottery result. Further, the control unit can update the setting suggestion effect group to the setting suggestion effect group A when the number of out balls reaches the suggestion effect opportunity reference 2. Therefore, the control unit can be expected to improve the operation by the player who is interested in acquiring the update opportunity of the setting suggestion effect group by providing the update opportunity of the setting suggestion effect group according to the number of out balls (game amount). In addition, the control unit can improve the interest of the player who has contributed to the operation by producing an increase in suggestion production opportunities with high suggestion strength according to the number of out balls (upper limit game amount). In such a game machine 10, the effect based on the set value contributes to the improvement of the operation of the game machine.

Next, the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 shown in FIG. 62 (1) are each based only on the number of out balls. For example, the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 is the number of out balls "100 shots", and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 is the number of out balls "20,000 shots".

The suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 shown in FIG. 62 (2) are based on the number of out balls and the base, respectively. For example, the suggestion production opportunity standard 1 is the number of out balls "10".
"0 shots" and base "25-35", suggestion production opportunity standard 2 is the number of out balls "2000"
"0 shots" and base "25-35". As a result, the control unit can limit the chances of reaching the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 based on the base. For example, the control unit can limit the chances of reaching the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 in a game state with normal electric support or an illegal game state such as an abnormality.

The suggested production opportunity standard 1 and the suggested production opportunity standard 2 shown in FIG. 62 (3) are based on the number of out balls and the amount of operation per minute, respectively. For example, the suggestion production opportunity standard 1 is the number of out balls "100 shots" and the operating amount per minute is "50 or more", and the suggestion production opportunity standard 2 is the number of out balls "20,000 shots" and the operating amount per minute " 45 or more. " As a result, the control unit
Opportunities to reach Suggestion Production Opportunity Criteria 1 and Suggestion Production Opportunity Criteria 2 can be limited by the amount of operation per minute. For example, the control unit can limit the chances of reaching the suggestion effect opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion effect opportunity standard 2 in a game including a break, a game in which the players are replaced, and an irregular game such as a stop strike.

It should be noted that the limitation of the achievement opportunity of the suggestion production opportunity standard 1 and the suggestion production opportunity standard 2 may use parameters other than the base and the operating amount per minute.
Next, the setting suggestion mode and the setting suggestion mode history notification will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63
Is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion mode and a setting suggestion mode history notification of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 63 (1) shows an example of the setting suggestion mode and the setting suggestion content. Even if the accuracy of each setting suggestion mode is uncertain, the game machine 10 makes a confirmation under predetermined conditions. For example, game machine 10
Does not give a definite setting suggestion only when the decorative symbol "7" stops to the left, but when the decorative symbol "7" stops to the left three times in a row, the setting "4" or more is confirmed. Also,
The game machine 10 does not give a definite setting suggestion only by the occurrence of normal reach, but
If the normal reach occurs three times in a row, the even number setting will be confirmed. In addition, the game machine 10 does not give a definite setting suggestion only by the operation of the intense heat accessory, but it is said that the setting "4" is denied from the setting "1" when the intense heat accessory operates three times in a row. It will be a definite report. The intense heat accessory has, for example, a predetermined operation in the board effect device 44.

In addition, if the decorative symbol "7" stops to the left three times in a row, it will be a confirmation notification that the setting "4" or more is confirmed, but the decorative symbol "7" has stopped to the left twice in a row, which is less than three times in a row. sometimes,
Although it is uncertain, it may be a notification having a predetermined suggestive strength. The same can be applied to other setting suggestion modes and setting suggestion contents. As a result, the game machine 10 can produce a multi-step suggestion intensity for one setting suggestion mode.

FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of setting suggestion mode history notification. Even if the game machine 10 may not be able to detect a specific setting from one setting indication content, it may be able to detect a specific setting from a plurality of setting suggestion modes. For example, if the decorative symbol "7" stops to the left three times in a row, it is only known that the setting "4" or more is confirmed, but when the normal reach occurs three times in a row, the even number setting is confirmed and the set value is "4". "Or" 6 ". Further, when the intense heat accessory operates three times in a row, the setting "4" is denied from the setting "1", so that it is possible to detect that the set value is "6".

Such detection of the set value can be realized by grasping the past setting suggestion mode. Therefore, the game machine 10 notifies the past setting suggestion mode as a history by the notification means. For example, the game machine 10 displays the history of past setting suggestion modes on the display device 41. The notification means is not limited to the display device 41, but may be another display device, a light emitter such as an LED, or a sound output device such as the speakers 19a and 19b. The production means included in the game machine 10 may also serve as a notification means.

For example, in the game machine 10, the setting suggestion mode "decorative symbol" 7 "stops to the left three times in a row" occurs twice, and the setting suggestion mode "normal reach occurs three times in a row" occurs. It is notified as a history that the number of times is 1 and that the number of occurrences of the setting suggestion mode "the intense heat accessory operates 3 times in a row" is 0 times. As a result, the game machine 10 can produce a hobby of setting detection for the player.

The timing of history initialization of the setting suggestion mode is a timing to be set in advance. For example, RAM initialization timing, setting change timing, end of big hit, end of normal power support after big hit, predetermined game amount detection There are things like that. Further, the history target of the setting suggestion mode may be the entire period after the history initialization, or a predetermined period (for example, the past one hour,
It may be the period of the latest 1000 out balls, etc.).

FIG. 63 (3) shows another example of setting suggestion mode history notification. Since the game machine 10 can produce a multi-step suggestion intensity from the number of appearances, that is, the appearance history of one setting suggestion mode, the suggestion intensity is produced by notifying the player of the appearance history. The effect can be enhanced. For example, in the game machine 10, how many times the setting suggestion mode "decorative symbol" 7 "stops to the left" is continuously generated, and how many times the setting suggestion mode "normal reach is generated" is continuously generated. , How many times is the number of consecutive occurrences of the setting suggestion mode "heated accessory operates"?
Can be notified as a history.

For example, in the game machine 10, the current number of consecutive occurrences of the setting suggestion mode "decorative symbol" 7 "stops to the left" is the second time, and the current number of consecutive occurrences of the setting suggestion mode "normal reach occurs" is 1. It is possible to notify by the notification means that it is the second time and that the current number of consecutive occurrences of the setting suggestion mode "the intense heat accessory is operating" is the 0th time.

As a result, the game machine 10 is set to the setting suggestion mode "decorative symbol" 7 "stops to the left".
It is possible to inform that the number of consecutive occurrences will be the third in each round, and that the number of consecutive occurrences will be the third in the next two times regarding the setting suggestion mode "normal reach occurs".

Further, the game machine 10 can produce a suggestion strength corresponding to two consecutive occurrences even if the number of consecutive occurrences does not reach three for the setting suggestion mode "decorative symbol" 7 "stops to the left". it can. Further, the game machine 10 can produce a suggestion intensity corresponding to one continuous occurrence even if the number of continuous occurrences does not reach three for the setting suggestion mode "normal reach occurs".

As described above, the game machine 10 can share the same effect mode between the suggestion effect having a high suggestion intensity and the suggestion effect having a low suggestion intensity by differently changing the suggestion intensity for each appearance condition for a predetermined effect mode. As a result, the game machine 10 can frequently appear a suggestion effect having a low suggestion intensity. For example, the game machine 10 can perform a setting suggestion effect by a frequent effect called liveliness.

[Modified example of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the accessory of the fourth embodiment and the suggestion mode. Game machine 10 of a modification of the fourth embodiment
Can perform a setting suggestion effect using an accessory.

In the game machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the accessory as shown in FIG. 64 (1) is provided in the game board. The accessory includes an out-mouth accessory 600 and a distribution accessory 602. The out-mouth accessory 600 is an out-port provided in the game area, and the game ball that enters the out-port accessory 600 is an out-ball. The out-port accessory 600 includes a movable piece 601 that can be opened and closed by a drive device (for example, a solenoid) (not shown), and distributes the game ball contained in the out-port accessory 600.
It is possible to guide to 2.

The distribution accessory 602 has a dish shape in which the guided game ball 610 can roll, and has three distribution holes 603,604,605. All of the distribution holes 603, 604, and 605 can accept the game ball 610, and the accepted game ball is discharged as an out ball.
Further, the distribution holes 603, 604, and 605 each have a detection device capable of detecting the game ball 610 and a light emitter such as an LED.

The distribution accessory 602 rolls the game ball 610 having a rolling force guided by the distribution accessory 602 in the circumferential direction of the distribution accessory 602, and then the game ball 610 that loses momentum is 3 Two distribution holes 603,6
Accept with either 04 or 605. The game machine 10 performs a setting suggestion effect according to the light emitting mode of one of the distribution holes 603, 604, 605 in which the game ball 610 is inserted.

The distribution accessory 602 is a game ball 61 in any of the three distribution holes 603, 604, 605.
Since 0 is accepted or cannot be controlled, the light emitting mode of the distribution holes 603, 604, 605 is switched in a time division manner, and the light emitting mode of one distribution hole containing the game ball 610 is matched with the setting suggestion effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), the light emitting mode of the distribution holes 603, 604, 605 is
The suggestion mode 1 is at the first timing, the suggestion mode 2 is at the second timing, and the suggestion mode 3 is at the third timing, and these suggestion modes are patrolled.

For example, in suggestion mode 1, the distribution hole 603 (hole A) emits blue light (shown by diagonal hatching).
Suggests setting "3" from setting "1". Further, suggestion mode 1 suggests setting "4" or setting "5" as the distribution hole 604 (hole B) emits yellow light (shown by crossed diagonal hatching). Further, the suggestion mode 1 suggests the setting "6" in which the distribution hole 605 (C hole) is set to emit red light (shown in dark color).

Suggestion mode 2 suggests setting "6" for hole A as red emission. Further, the suggestion mode 2 is B.
It suggests setting "3" from setting "1" to set the hole as blue light emission. In addition, suggestion mode 2 suggests setting "4" or setting "5" for the C hole as yellow light emission.

Suggestion mode 3 suggests setting "4" or setting "5" for hole A as yellow emission. Also,
Suggestion mode 3 suggests setting "6" with the B hole as red emission. Further, the suggestion mode 3 suggests setting "3" from setting "1" for the C hole as blue light emission.

The gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment stops the suggestion mode that has been patrolled and switched so that the light emitting mode of one distribution hole containing the game ball 610 and the setting suggestion effect match. To do.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment produces an effect based on the set value.
It can be done so as to contribute to the improvement of the operation of the game machine.
The gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment has a display device 41 in order to clarify the correspondence between the light emitting mode of the distribution holes 603,604,605 and the set value suggested by the light emitting mode. The correspondence may be clarified by such means.

In the game machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the out ball, but the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the enclosed ball previously enclosed in the accessory. You may.

In addition, in order to match the light emitting mode of one distribution hole containing the game ball 610 with the setting suggestion effect, a closing device is provided in the distribution holes 603, 604, 605, and the distribution holes 603 in the open state are provided. 6
The game ball 610 may be inserted only in 04 and 605.

The out-mouth accessory 600 and the distribution accessory 602 are examples of the accessory that can perform the setting suggestion effect, and may be other forms of the accessory. In addition, the distribution character 602 is a game ball 610.
I tried to give a setting suggestion effect according to the light emitting mode of one distribution hole containing, but the distribution hole 60
The setting suggestion effect may be performed by the number of the game balls 610 accepted in one or all of 3,604,605. Further, the accessory capable of performing the setting suggestion effect may be a movable accessory, and in that case, the operation mode of the movable accessory is controlled in accordance with the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a detection means (payout control device 200, out ball detection switch signal) capable of detecting the number of game balls entering the game area (for example, the number of out balls), and two or more different game performances. One of the setting means (game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) capable of setting the game performance, and the effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the suggested effect of the set game performance. , Display device 41, board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, board effect device 44, upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b, out port accessory 600 and distribution accessory 602.
Etc.) and 1 suggestion effect group is selected from 2 or more suggestion effect groups having different suggestion strengths based on the number of game balls, and the set suggestion effect of the game performance is selected as 1 suggestion effect. Control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) that is selected from the group and executed by the effect control means.
) And (see FIGS. 61 and 64).

(2) The control means of (1) notifies the execution history of the suggestion effect by the notification means (FIG. 63).
reference).
(3) The control means of (1) has different suggested intensities for each appearance condition for a predetermined effect mode (see FIG. 63).

(4) The control means of (1) determines the operation mode of the accessory in response to the suggestion effect (see FIG. 64).
[Fifth Embodiment]
The game machine 10 of the fifth embodiment can selectively execute the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, and the big hit random value is determined to be a big hit in each of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game. If it matches the value, the big hit is derived, and if it matches the small hit judgment value, the small hit is derived.

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path in the special game state and the specific area switch. Although it is said that the game machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different from the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is triggered by a small hit, although it is said that the state is set to a high probability based on the detection by 38e. The big hit can also be derived by the game ball winning in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38 flowing into the V flow path and being detected by the specific area switch 38e.

First, the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. Figure 6
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the gaming performance of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.
The game machine 10 selectively executes the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game while giving priority to the special figure 2 game among the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game. The hit generation condition of the game machine 10 is shown in FIG. 65 (1).
). In the special figure 1 game, the jackpot occurrence probability at which the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot judgment value is 1.
It is set to / 200, and the probability of small hit occurrence in which the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value is set to 1/30. In the special figure 2 game, the jackpot occurrence probability at which the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot judgment value is 1/200.
Then, the probability of small hit occurrence in which the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value is set to 1/7. Therefore, although the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game have the same jackpot occurrence probability, the small hit occurrence probability of the special figure 2 game is larger than the small hit occurrence probability of the special figure 1 game.

Further, in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38 as a trigger of a small hit flows into the V flow path and is detected by the specific area switch 38e (
The jackpot can be derived by V winning). However, V at the time of a small hit in the special figure 1 game
Unlike the door opening mode (opening time, opening timing, etc.) and the V door opening mode at the time of a small hit in the special figure 2 game, it is easier to win the V prize in the special figure 2 game than in the V prize in the special figure 1 game. It has become. For example, in the special figure 1 game, it is difficult for the winning game ball to flow into the V flow path in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38 triggered by the small hit, and in the special figure 2 game, the small hit is triggered. Therefore, it is easy for the winning game ball to flow into the V flow path in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38.

The game machine 10 transitions to the normal electric support state (time saving game) after the jackpot of the special figure 1 game ends or after the jackpot of the special figure 2 game ends. The time saving performance of the game machine 10 is shown in FIG. 65 (2).
The condition for generating the normal power support state is after the big hit is completed in both the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game. One of the end conditions of the normal power support state (end condition A) is the arrival of a predetermined number of variable display times. For example, the number of variable impressions that is the end condition of the normal power support status is shown in Special Figure 1.
The total number of the variable display number of the game and the variable display number of the special figure 2 game is 7 rotations or 100 rotations.

The number of variable display times, which is the end condition of the normal power support state, can be determined by the symbol displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the symbol displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Further, although it may be possible to distinguish by the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 41, it may not be possible to discriminate depending on the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 41.

Another end condition (end condition B) of the normal electric support state is the arrival of a predetermined number of small hits. For example, the number of small hits, which is the end condition of the normal electric support state, is four for the special figure 1 game and one for the special figure 2 game.

As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the player from winning a V prize by aiming at the type of small hit of the special figure 2 game (the symbol displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) in the normal electric support state (
It is possible to prevent games that are advantageous to a specific player). In addition, the game machine 10 can prevent the disadvantage (loss of big hit opportunity) of ending the normal electric support state without being able to win a V prize due to the occurrence of a small hit in the special figure 1 game in the general electric support state.

The prevention of games and the loss of jackpot opportunities in favor of a specific player will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a reserved digestion example 1 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a reserved digestion example 2 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 shows a hold digestion example 3 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the fifth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a reserved digestion example 4 of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the fifth embodiment.

First, FIG. 66 shows a reserved digestion example 1 that is often seen in normal games. The special figure 1 hold after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 66 (1) has four hold memories, and the hit (big hit, small hit) is not included among them. The reserved memory that is not a hit is indicated by "x". The special figure 2 hold after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 66 (1) has no hold memory. In addition, it is indicated by "-" that there is no hold memory.
In both the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold, the hold memory is digested from the left side, and each time it is digested, the hold memory is sequentially shifted to the left.

After the jackpot ends, the game machine 10 transitions to the time saving state, and digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold. The special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold shown in FIG. 66 (2) show how all the hold memories have been digested.

In the game machine 10, the special figure 2 hold is more likely to increase than the special figure 1 hold due to the general electric support in the time saving state. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 66 (3) has no hold memory. FIG. 66 (
The special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in 3) has four hold memories, of which the hit is not included.

The game machine 10 digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold in the time saving state. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 66 (4) has no hold memory. FIG. 66 (4)
In the special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in, there are four hold memories, including the first one of them.
The remaining three do not include hits. The reserved memory that is a small hit is indicated by "○".

As a result, the game machine 10 generates a small hit of the special figure 2 game with the first one hold memory of the special figure 2 hold, and generates a big hit by the V winning triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game. In this way, the game machine 10 considers the occurrence of a big hit triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game in the time saving state as one of the game characteristics.

Next, FIG. 67 shows a hold digestion example 2 which is an example of suppressing the disadvantage (loss of big hit opportunity) of ending the normal electric support state without being able to win a V prize due to the occurrence of a small hit in the special figure 1 game.
The special figure 1 hold after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 67 (1) has four hold memories, the third of which includes the hold memory which is a small hit, and the other hold memories do not include the hit. The special figure 2 hold after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 67 (1) has no hold memory.

After the jackpot ends, the game machine 10 transitions to the time saving state, and digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold. The special figure 1 hold shown in FIG. 67 (2) shows that two hold memories have been digested from the special figure 1 hold shown in FIG. 67 (1), the first one includes a hit, and the remaining one.
Does not include hits.

As a result, the game machine 10 generates a small hit of the special figure 1 game in the first hold memory of the special figure 1 hold, but it is not easy to win a V prize triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game. Miss the jackpot opportunity. However, the number of small hits, which is the condition for ending the normal power support state, is shown in Special Figure 1.
Since the number of small hits in the game is 4, the end condition of the normal power support state is not satisfied and the normal power support state continues.

In the game machine 10, the special figure 2 hold is more likely to increase than the special figure 1 hold due to the general electric support in the time saving state. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 67 (3) has no hold memory. FIG. 67 (
The special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in 3) has four hold memories, of which the hit is not included.

The game machine 10 digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold in the time saving state. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 67 (4) has no hold memory. FIG. 67 (4)
In the special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in, there are four hold memories, including the first one of them.
The remaining three do not include hits.

As a result, the game machine 10 generates a small hit of the special figure 2 game with the first one hold memory of the special figure 2 hold, and generates a big hit by the V winning triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game. In this way, the game machine 10 considers the occurrence of a big hit triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game in the time saving state as one of the game characteristics. In addition, the game machine 10 suppresses the disadvantage of ending the normal electric support state due to the occurrence of a small hit in the special figure 1 game.

Next, FIG. 68 shows a hold digestion example 3 in which the hold memory that is the hit in the special figure 2 hold is digested first even if there is the hold memory that hits the hold in the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 68 (1) has four hold memories, the third of which includes the hold memory which is a small hit, and the other hold memories do not include the hit. The special figure 2 hold after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 68 (1) has no hold memory.

After the jackpot ends, the game machine 10 transitions to the time saving state, and digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold. At this time, FIG. 68 (2) shows the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold in which the special figure 2 hold occurred before the special figure 1 hold was digested. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 68 (2) is
The special figure 1 shown in FIG. 68 (1) remains on hold. The special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 68 (2) has four hold memories, the fourth of which includes a hold memory that is a small hit, and the other hold memories do not include a hit.

The game machine 10 digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold in the time saving state. The game machine 10 includes a hit in both the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold, but since the special figure 2 hold is digested first, the special figure 2 hold hit occurs first. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 68 (3) remains the special figure 1 hold shown in FIG. 68 (1). The special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 68 (3) has four hold memories, the first one of which includes a hit and the remaining three do not include a hit.

As a result, the game machine 10 can generate a small hit of the special figure 2 game with the first one hold memory of the special figure 2 hold, and can generate a big hit by a V prize triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game. To do.
In addition, in the game machine 10, if the end condition of the normal electric support state is set to the end condition A, the special figure 2
Depending on the type of small hit in the game, there is a risk of causing the player to forgo the V prize, that is, to motivate the player to avoid winning the prize in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38. Therefore, the game machine 10 prepares the end condition B in addition to the end condition A as the end condition of the normal electric support state.

For example, if the player identifies the type of small hit in the special figure 2 game and avoids winning a prize in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38, the game machine 10 shortens the time due to the establishment of the end condition B (Public support). Exit the state.

In the normal state, the game machine 10 digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold, as shown in FIG. 68 (4). Therefore, the game machine 10 can prevent the special variable winning device 38 from winning a prize in the winning opening as a loss of a big hit opportunity, and can prevent a game that is advantageous to the specific player. In addition, the game machine 10 secures a big hit opportunity for a player who does not try to avoid winning a prize in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38, and provides a fair game opportunity. That is,
The game machine 10 makes it possible to play widely and fairly.

Next, FIG. 69 shows another example of a reserved digestion in which the reserved memory in the special figure 2 hold is digested first even if there is a reserved memory in the special figure 1 hold, and a reserved digestion example 4 is shown in FIG. .. FIG. 69 (1)
The special figure 1 hold after the end of the big hit shown in (1) has four hold memories, the third of which includes the hold memory which is a small hit, and the other hold memories do not include the hit. The special figure 2 hold after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 69 (1) has no hold memory.

After the jackpot ends, the game machine 10 transitions to the time saving state, and digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold. At this time, FIG. 69 (2) shows the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold in which the special figure 2 hold occurred before the special figure 1 hold was digested. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 69 (2) is
The special figure 1 shown in FIG. 69 (1) remains on hold. The special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 69 (2) has four hold memories, the fourth of which includes a hold memory that is a small hit, and does not include a hit in the other hold memories.

The game machine 10 digests the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold while giving priority to the special figure 2 hold in the time saving state. The game machine 10 includes a hit in both the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold, but since the special figure 2 hold is digested first, the special figure 2 hold hit occurs first. The special figure 1 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 69 (3) remains the special figure 1 hold shown in FIG. 69 (1). The special figure 2 hold during the time reduction shown in FIG. 69 (3) has four hold memories, of which the first one and the last one include a hit, and the remaining two do not include a hit.

As a result, the game machine 10 can generate a small hit of the special figure 2 game with the first one hold memory of the special figure 2 hold, and can generate a big hit by a V prize triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game. To do.
In addition, the game machine 10 generates a small hit of the special figure 2 game with the last one hold memory of the special figure 2 hold, and makes it possible to generate a big hit by a V prize triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game. ..

Therefore, when the game machine 10 notifies the player by the hold look-ahead notice that the special figure 2 hold includes two hits, the game machine 10 enters the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38 invalidated in the hold digestion example 3. May give motivation to avoid winning prizes.

For example, the game machine 10 generates a small hit of the special figure 2 game with the first one hold memory of the special figure 2 hold, and makes it possible to generate a big hit by a V prize triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game. .. Here, when the player identifies the type of small hit in the special figure 2 game and avoids winning a prize in the winning opening of the special variable winning device 38, the game machine 10 shortens the time due to the establishment of the end condition B (Public support). )
Exit the state.

However, in the normal (after the end of the time reduction) special figure 2 hold shown in FIG. 69 (4), the hold memory is 1.
There is one, including hits. The game machine 10 generates a small hit of the special figure 2 game by the hold memory of the special figure 2 hold, and makes it possible to generate a big hit by a V prize triggered by the small hit of the special figure 2 game.

That is, the game machine 10 cannot prevent the game in favor of the specific player, even though the time saving (Public electricity support) state is terminated by the satisfaction of the end condition B. Therefore, the game machine 10 does not notify the player of the fact that a plurality of hits are included in the special figure 2 hold by the hold look-ahead notice, thereby preventing the game from being advantageous to the specific player.

Next, control of whether or not the hold look-ahead notice can be executed will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of whether or not the hold look-ahead notice of the fifth embodiment can be executed.
FIG. 70 (1) shows the pending state classification of the special figure 2 hold. Special Figure 2 There are eight hold status categories from hold status 1 to hold status 8. The hold state 1 includes a big hit in the special figure 2 hold, and the small hit is d. c. (Don't care). The hold state 2 does not include a hit (big hit, small hit) in the special figure 2 hold. The hold state 3 does not include the big hit and the small hit (small hit B) with 100 times of time reduction in the special figure 2 hold, and 1 small hit (small hit A) with 7 times of time reduction.
Including one. The hold state 4 does not include the big hit and the small hit A in the special figure 2 hold, but includes one small hit B. The hold state 5 does not include the big hit in the special figure 2 hold, but includes one small hit A and one small hit B. The hold state 6 does not include the big hit and the small hit B in the special figure 2 hold, and includes two or more small hits A. The hold state 7 does not include the big hit and the small hit A in the special figure 2 hold, and includes two or more small hits B. The hold state 8 does not include the big hit in the special figure 2 hold, and includes at least one small hit A and one small hit B, and includes three or more in total.

FIG. 70 (2) shows the effect state according to the hold state of the special figure 2 hold. The jackpot notice is a pre-reading notice effect that notifies the special figure 2 hold that the jackpot is included with a certain degree of certainty.
The small hit notice 1 is a look-ahead notice effect for notifying that the special figure 2 hold includes the small hit A or the small hit B with a certain degree of certainty. The small hit notice 2 is a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice that the small hit A is included in the special figure 2 hold with a certain degree of certainty. The small hit notice 3 is a look-ahead notice effect for notifying that the small hit B is included in the special figure 2 hold with a certain degree of certainty.

Therefore, the small hit notice 3 that pre-reads the small hit B, which is more advantageous for the player than the small hit A, avoids the player from winning the special variable winning device 38 in the winning opening with the small hit A in the hold digestion example 4. Can motivate you to do so.

Therefore, the game machine 10 sets the big hit notice "yes", the small hit notice 1 "none", the small hit notice 2 "none", and the small hit notice 3 "none" in the hold state 1. Further, the game machine 10 has a big hit notice "none", a small hit notice 1 "none", a small hit notice 2 "none", and a small hit notice 3 "none" in the hold state 2. The game machine 10 has a big hit notice "none", a small hit notice 1 "yes", and a small hit notice 2 "yes" in the hold state 3, the hold state 5, the hold state 6, and the hold state 8.
, Small hit notice 3 "None". In the hold state 4 and the hold state 7, the game machine 10 has a big hit notice "none", a small hit notice 1 "yes", a small hit notice 2 "none", and a small hit notice 3 "yes".

As described above, the game machine 10 does not select the small hit notice 3 when the small hit A and the small hit B are duplicated in the special figure 2 hold. As a result, the game machine 10 can hide the existence of the small hit B from the player when the small hit A is derived in the special figure 2 hold. On the other hand, since the game machine 10 does not hide the existence of the small hit A from the player when the small hit B is derived in the special figure 2 hold, it produces a feeling of expectation for the player to hit continuously. it can.

The game machine 10 limits the selection of the small hit notice 3 and does not limit the selection of the small hit notice 1, but limits the selection of the small hit notice 1 which does not distinguish between the small hit A and the small hit B. It may be something to do. Further, although the game machine 10 limits the selection of the small hit notice 3 and does not limit the selection of the big hit notice, the game machine 10 may limit the selection of the big hit notice.

Further, the game machine 10 may limit the pre-reading notice when there are two or more small hits in the special figure 2 hold regardless of the small hit A and the small hit B. Further, the game machine 10 may limit the pre-reading notice when there are two or more hits in the special figure 2 hold regardless of the big hit in addition to the small hit A and the small hit B.

[Modified Example of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. The gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the fifth embodiment limits the look-ahead notice by the generation order of the pending storage that becomes the hit, instead of the type of the hit.

First, FIG. 71 shows an example of hold digestion in which there are a plurality of hold memories corresponding to the hold of Special Figure 2. FIG. 71
Is a diagram showing a reserved digestion example of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The special figure 1 hold before the big hit shown in FIG. 71 (1) and during the time reduction has no hold memory. Figure 7
The special figure 2 hold before the big hit occurs and during the time reduction shown in 1 (1) has four hold memories, including the hold memory that hits the first one and the last one, and others. Does not include hits in the hold memory of. At this time, the game machine 10 does not give a pre-reading notice notification to any of the pending memories that are hit.

After this, the game machine 10 generates a big hit based on the hold memory of the first one of the special figure 2 hold. It does not matter whether this big hit is due to a V prize at the time of a small hit or a big hit without going through a small hit.

The special figure 1 hold during the jackpot shown in FIG. 71 (2) has two hold memories, and none of the hold memories includes a hit. The special figure 2 hold during the jackpot shown in FIG. 71 (2) has four hold memories and includes a hold memory that is the third hit. The hold memory, which is the third hit, is shown in FIG. 71 (1).
) Corresponds to the last hold memory of the special figure 2 hold shown in).

The game machine 10 selects the reserved memory that is the third hit as the target of the pre-reading advance notice notification, and uses the required advance notice notification means (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) to notify the pre-reading advance notice at the required timing. Do it. The hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice is indicated by "◎".

The game machine 10 restricts the selection of the other reserved memory as the target of the pre-reading notice notification by selecting one of the reserved memory from the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold as the target of the pre-reading notice notification. .. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (3), there are four hold memories of the special figure 1 hold during the big hit, and even if the fourth hold memory is a hit, it is not subject to the look-ahead notice notification.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), the hold memory of the special figure 2 hold during the time reduction after the end of the big hit shifts due to digestion, and even if the fourth hold memory is a hit, it is subject to the look-ahead notice notification. It does not become. Further, even if the fourth hold memory of the special figure 1 hold during the time reduction after the end of the big hit is a hit, it is not subject to the pre-reading notice notification.

As a result, the game machine 10 uses FIG. 69 by limiting the target of the look-ahead notice notification to one hold memory when there are two or more hits in the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. It is possible to prevent a game that is advantageous to a specific player, such as the reserved digestion example 4 described above.

Further, the game machine 10 can simplify the process related to the look-ahead notice notification and reduce the game control processing load by limiting the target of the look-ahead notice notification to one hold storage. Further, the game machine 10 reduces the occurrence rate of the look-ahead notice notification when there are two or more hits in the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. That is, the game machine 10 can relatively increase the occurrence rate of the pre-reading advance notice notification at the normal time. Further, the game machine 10 can secure a certain expectation for the hit even if the occurrence rate of the look-ahead notice notification is low when there are no more than two hits in the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold.

[Limited processing for advance notice notification]
Next, a notice notification target limiting process for limiting the target of the look-ahead notice notification will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the advance notice notification target limiting process of the modified example of the fifth embodiment. The advance notice notification target limitation process is a process executed by the control unit of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 executes the advance notice notification target limitation process when the command of the look-ahead notice notification system (for example, the command when the look-ahead fluctuates) is acquired from the game control device 100.

[Step D111] The control unit determines whether or not the advance notice notification target (target of the look-ahead advance notice notification) is being set. The control unit proceeds to step D112 when the advance notice notification target is not set, and ends the advance notice notification target limitation process when the advance notice notification target is being set. That is,
The control unit limits the setting of a new notice notification target when the notice notification target is being set.

[Step D112] The control unit determines whether or not the number of reserved storages that are candidates for the advance notice notification is one. The control unit proceeds to step D114 when the number of reserved storages which are candidates for the advance notice notification is one, and proceeds to step D113 when the number is not one.

[Step D113] The control unit selects one of the reserved memories that are candidates for the advance notice notification.
Select as a notice notification target. The candidates for the advance notice notification are selected according to predetermined selection criteria such as the type of hit, the order of occurrence of the reserved memory, the distinction between the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold, or a combination thereof. The control unit may select the advance notice target using different selection criteria according to the game state.

[Step D114] The control unit sets the selected advance notice notification target and ends the advance notice notification target limitation process. In addition, the set notice notification target is canceled by the hold digestion of the hold memory.

In this way, the game machine 10 can limit the target of the look-ahead notice notification. In the game machine 10, the control unit of the effect control device 300 executes the advance notice notification target limitation process, but the game control device 100 may realize the process. In that case, the game control device 1
In 00, a command of the look-ahead notice notification system (for example, a command when the look-ahead changes) may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a state where the target of the look-ahead notice notification is limited.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a first hit (for example, as a result of a first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game) or a second variable display game (for example, a special figure 2 game).
(Small hit) can be derived, the second hit (for example, big hit) can be derived with the first hit as an opportunity, and after the second hit, the game state and the second fluctuation of the first variation display game The game state of the display game is set to a special game state (for example, a normal electric support game state, a time-saving game state) in which the game can proceed in an advantageous manner for the player, and in the special game state, the result of the first variable display game or the second The end condition of the special gaming state is that the result of the variable display game is derived a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions), and the result of the first variable display game or the second
The game control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), in which the end condition of the special game state is that the first hit is derived a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of small hits) among the results of the variable display game. (See FIG. 65).

(2) The game machine 10 is the first hit (for example, as a result of the first variable display game (for example, special figure 1 game) or the result of the second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 game).
The small hit) can be derived, the second hit (for example, the big hit) can be derived with the first hit as an opportunity, and after the second hit, the game state of the first variation display game or the second variation The game state of the display game is set to a special game state (for example, a normal electric support game state, a time-saving game state) in which the game can proceed in an advantageous manner for the player, and in the special game state, the result of the first variable display game or the second The end condition of the special gaming state is that the result of the variable display game is derived a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions), and the result of the first variable display game or the second
The game control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), in which the end condition of the special game state is that the first hit is derived a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of small hits) among the results of the variable display game. (See FIG. 65).

(3) The game control means of (1) or (2) is a second variation display game rather than a second hit derivation triggered by the first hit as a result of the first variation display game. As a result, the derivation of the second hit triggered by the first hit is facilitated (see FIG. 65).

(4) The game control means of (1) or (2) has a second variation display rather than the number of times that the first hit is derived as a result of the first variation display game among the end conditions of the special game state. Increase the number of times the first hit is derived as a result of the game (see FIG. 65).

(5) The game control means of (4) sets the number of times that the first hit is derived as a result of the second variable display game to one (see FIG. 65).
(6) The game control means of (4) or (5) can derive two or more first hits having different values for the player as a result of the second variable display game (see FIG. 65).

According to one aspect, it is possible to play widely and fairly in a game machine.
The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program that describes the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, and CD (Compact Disk) -RO.
There are M / RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as the magneto-optical recording medium.
And so on.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. In addition, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions can be performed by DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A.
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims, not by the above description.
It is intended to include all changes within the meaning and scope of the claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

In order to achieve the above object, a game machine as shown below is provided. The game machine includes a display means, a setting means, and a control means. The display means can display the game. The setting means can set one of two or more different game performances. Control means can be performed in parallel and suggesting suggests directing a predetermined game Starring unloading and configuration to gaming performance in Gate arm.

Claims (1)

Display means that can display the game and
A setting means that can set one of two or more different game performances,
A predetermined game effect is executed in the game in the first period until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a game performance set in parallel with the game effect is suggested in the second period after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is equipped with a control means for executing a suggestion effect.
Game machine.

Images